SlideShare a Scribd company logo
132 PAGES! Master every tool in the Photoshop toolbar
AdobePhotoshop
Everytoolexplained!
Unleashthefullpowerbehindevery
iconinthePhotoshoptoolbar
132pagesofeasy-to-followtutorials
andexpertadvicetohelpdevelopyour
AdobePhotoshopskills
Adobe photoshop   every tool explained! -Prabhaharan429
S
tart up Photoshop and what do you see? Well,
besides the menu options along the top of the
screen, you’ll see a Toolbar that’s chock-a-block
with icons. You’ll probably recognise some of these,
such as the ‘T’ that designates the Type tool and the
paintbrush icon that unlocks the various Brush tools.
But do you really know what the rest of these icons
mean? … Honestly? The chances are that – like many
Photoshop users across the world – you’re only using a
fraction of the program’s full potential, but this second
issue in the Photoshop Focus Guide series will change
all that, helping you make the most of all the tools at
your disposal.
Even professional designers often admit to being
hopeless with the Healing Brush and dodgy with the
Dodge tool, but there’s really no reason for any of the
tools to be a mystery. This issue will help you get more
from the Clone, Gradient, Paths and Effects tools, to
name but a few. You’ll find expert tips and advice for
working more efficiently with each of the tools, as well
as tutorials to demonstrate exactly how to carry out
useful image-editing tasks. In the final section you’ll
find a step-by-step guide that brings together all the
skills you’ve learnt, showing how to create a striking
Photoshop image.
And let’s not forget the CD that
accompanies your Focus
Guide. On here you’ll
find a library of stock
images (worth £1,990),
plug-ins and video training
tutorials to enhance your
enjoyment of Photoshop
further still!
Have fun!
Polish up your knowledge…
Unravel the mysteries of the Photoshop Toolbar and
its resident icons.They’re not as scary as they look!
3ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Welcome
Editor Dan McNamara
Art Editor Simon Bleeze
Writer Simon Danaher
Production Clive Somerville
Jonathan Palmer
Cover image Chris Stocker
New Media Co-ordinator Matt Gallimore
Production Co-ordinator Diane Ross
Group Publisher DaveTaylor
Publishing Director JohnWeir
Distributed through the UK Newstrade by
Seymour Distribution,
86 Newman Street,LondonW1T 3EX
Overseas Distribution by
Future Publishing Ltd.
Printed in the EU
Future Publishing Ltd
30 Monmouth Street, Bath BA1 2BW
www.thefuturenetwork.plc.uk
We recommend that you always maintain
an up-to-date backup of your hard disk data.
Future Publishing does not accept any
responsibility for disruption,damage and/or
loss to your data or computer system that
may occur while carrying out procedures
described in this publication.
Future Publishing is part of The Future Network plc.
The Future Network produces carefully targeted specialist magazines and
websites for groups of people who share a passion.We aim to satisfy their
passion by creating titles that offer superb value for money, trustworthy
information, multiple ways to save time and money, and are a pleasure to
read or visit. Today we publish more than 80 magazines and over 30
magazine websites and networks from offices in four countries. The
company also licenses 32 of its titles resulting in over 60 local editions in
a further 23 countries.The Future Network plc is a public company quoted
on the London Stock Exchange (symbol: FNET).
Non-executive Chairman Roger Parry
Chief Executive Greg Ingham
Chief Operating Officer & Managing Director, UK Colin Morrison
Finance Director John Bowman
Tel +44 1225 442244 www.thefuturenetwork.plc.uk
Bath • London • Milan • New York • Paris • San Francisco
All contents © Future Publishing Ltd, 2003
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior
permission of the publisher.
Websites mentioned in this publication are not under our control. We are not
responsible for the contents of these sites or any changes or updates to them.
None of the information in this guide is intended as legal advice.The articles are
for information purposes only.
4 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
With so much to say about
Adobe Photoshop it’s been
difficult to cram all the information
that we wanted to include into this
Focus Guide. That’s why you’ll find
the special icons that occupy the
margins so very useful.
As you leaf through the pages,
you’ll find a range of attractive
symbols, each of which denotes an
extra nugget of knowledge. The
icons enable you to identify exactly
what kind of information you’re
dealing with – for a full guide to
icon categories, see below. These
handy hints, tips and shortcuts are
always relevant to the topic that’s
being discussed, and will help you
develop your Photoshop skills that
little bit faster.
Our writers are always experienced
Photoshop experts who regularly
contribute to our sister magazines,
such as Computer Arts and Digital
Camera Magazine. So you can rest
assured that all the information
they provide is both authoritative
and thoroughly tried-and-tested.
Finding your way
Read this Guide from beginning to end or dip in and out
as you please.Either way,our icons will prove indispensable…
5ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Icons explained
On your CD-ROM
Some of the software that we refer to may be
included on your bonus CD.Every now and then
we remind you of this by flagging up the disc icon
and listing what’s on it.Handy,eh?
Top tips
This indicates an expert tip.Anything sheltered
beneath this icon is guaranteed to reveal a useful
hint about using Photoshop’s extensive range of
tools,palettes and features.
Further information
We’d like to tell you absolutely everything,but
there’s just not enough space.Instead we refer
you to other useful resources,such as websites
and specialist books for further reading.
Shortcuts
Carrying out common tasks again and again can
get a little tedious.Our handy shortcuts show you
how to carry out these tasks with a few deft
key-presses,saving you lots of time and effort.
Take note
You’ll find a number of these nuggets of knowledge
scattered throughout the Guide.They’re crammed
with useful information that complements the
main text perfectly.
Watch out!
The skull and crossbones sign means proceed
with caution.You’ll find some important points
outlined below this icon,which you should
certainly take seriously.
Links
When we refer to a website,we may pull out the
web address in the sidebar to make it easier for
you to read and remember.
6 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Contents
CONTENTS
Selections
1 SELECTIONTOOLS IN PHOTOSHOP 10
Making selections is the core of Photoshop’s way of working.There are a variety
of tools you can use for the purpose,so here’s how to get the most out of them
BASIC SELECTION TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
THE LASSO TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
THE MAGNETIC LASSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
THE MAGIC WAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
QUICK MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
WORKING WITH THE QUICK MASK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
SELECTIONS, MASKS AND CHANNELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
SLICES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Navigation and manipulation
NAVIGATING AND EDITINGYOUR IMAGES 22
Getting around inside an image is important if you are to work quickly and efficiently.
This chapter covers the view navigation tools and shortcuts for managing your workspace2 PANNING AND ZOOMING IMAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
THE NAVIGATOR PANEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
VIEW MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
MOVE, ALIGN AND DISTRIBUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
THE MOVE TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
DIRECT AND PATH SELECTION TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
VECTOR SHAPES AND MULTIPLE PATHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
7ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Contents
Brushes and Pencil tools
USINGTHE BRUSHES AND PENCILTOOLS 32
This chapter introduces you to Photoshop’s more arty tools,the Brushes.
But as you’ll discover,you can use these versatile tools for far more than just painting3 THE BRUSH TOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
USING BRUSHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
EXPLORING THE BRUSHES PALETTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
THE BRUSHES PALETTE IN DETAIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
SCATTERING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
TEXTURES AND DUAL BRUSHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
THE HISTORY BRUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
USING THE HISTORY BRUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ART HISTORY BRUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4 THE RUBBER STAMP (CLONE) TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
REMOVING UNWANTED ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
CLONING SKIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
THE HEALING BRUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
THE HEALING PATCH TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5 THE PAINT BUCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
MORE FILL OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
THE GRADIENT TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
THE GRADIENT EDITOR PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
USING GRADIENTS CREATIVELY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
GRADIENT STYLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
GRADIENT MASKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
MASKS AND SELECTIONS IN DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
MAGIC AND BACKGROUND ERASERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Cloning and Healing tools
USINGTHE CLONING AND HEALINGTOOLS 46
The Cloning and Healing tools in Photoshop offer an elegant way to fix damaged photos,
correct bad scans and generally clean up your images.And they’re great fun to use
Gradients,Fills and Erasing
THE GRADIENT,FILL AND ERASERTOOLS 54
Once you get more competent with Photoshop you’ll appreciate the importance of these
utility tools.The Gradient tool in particular is essential for all manner of tricks and effects
8 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Contents
6 THE ‘FOCUS’ TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
THE BLUR TOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
THE SHARPEN TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
THE SMUDGE TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
WORKING WITH THE SMUDGE TOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
DODGE AND BURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
THE SPONGE TOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
USING DODGE AND BURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
FOCUSING IN WITH DODGE AND BURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7 THE TYPE TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
TYPE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
TYPE TOOL TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
USING THE WARP TEXT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
RASTERIZING TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
STYLED TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8 USING THE PEN TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
VECTOR SHAPES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
USING VECTOR SHAPES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
MASKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
VECTOR SHAPE DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Effects Tools
GETTINGTO KNOW THE EFFECTSTOOLS 68
Photoshop’s effects tools include Blur,Sharpen,Smudge,Dodge and Burn.Discover how
best to use them to spice up your artwork,composites and photographic images
Text
WORKING WITHTHETYPETOOL 80
Creating text in Photoshop is quite easy to do,whether it’s for artistic effect or simply to add
essential information.This chapter looks at the various options available with theType tool
Vectors
WORKING WITH PATHS,VECTORS AND MASKS 90
Photoshop has always used vector-based‘paths’to draw smooth shapes and outlines.
Learn how the latest version has the ability to create shapes and masks with vectors too
9ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Contents
CD PAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
GLOSSARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
9 NOTES AND ANNOTATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
THE EYE DROPPER TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
USING THE EYE DROPPER TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
THE COLOUR SAMPLER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
THE MEASURE TOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Miscellaneous tools and Utilities
ANNOTATIONS,NOTES ANDTHE MEASURETOOL 100
Along with the creative tools,Photoshop provides several tools to add accuracy,sound and
vision to your work.These fall into two tool groups – Notation and Measurement tools
Essential information
CD PAGES AND RESOURCES 120
Your essential guide to the software on your disc.
Plus our handy glossary and index
10 CREATING A MONTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
FIX MISSING PARTS OF THE IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
USING THE PEN AS A BRUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
ADDING A BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
APPLYING ARTISTIC DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
VECTOR SHAPE AND TYPE LAYERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Artwork project
CREATINGTOP QUALITY ARTWORK 108
In this final chapter we’ll put together a piece of artwork using all the tools and options that
we’ve looked at over the course of this Photoshop Focus Guide
Chapter 1
SELECTION
TOOLSIN
PHOTOSHOP
In earlier versions of Photoshop
there was no Select tool – one
that looked like a traditional arrow
cursor, that you would use to select
‘objects’. Because Photoshop dealt
primarily with pixels, it made no
sense to have a Select tool – there
were no ‘objects’ to select. Instead,
the selection tools were default tools
– ones you used automatically, to
begin editing.
In Photoshop 7.0 there is an arrow
tool for selecting objects, since the
introduction of vector shapes (those
drawn using a series of points or
‘vectors’) made this necessary.
Despite this, the selection tools, in
their many and varied forms, are still
In this chapter…
Discover how the
Photoshop selection
tools work
Learn how to make
accurate selections
Create partial or
gradient selections
Making selections is the core of Photoshop’s
way of working.There are a variety of tools you
can use for the purpose,so let’s take a look at
how to get the most out of them
the main tools for doing 90% of the
tasks in Photoshop.
Selections are an essential part of
understanding Photoshop’s methods
and central to the way the program
works – making a selection then
performing an action on that
selection is the basic workflow.
The better you become at Photoshop
the better you’ll become at making
selections and vice-versa.
No need for discretion
What’s important to understand,
though, is that selections are not
necessarily discreet. They don’t have
to define rigidly what is or is not
selected – they can be partial too.
It is perfectly possible to make
selections so that some pixels are
100% selected and others are 100%
unselected, and in between there is a
selection gradient, where pixels are
partially selected. This is how you
create effects that blend smoothly
into existing pixels, and this also
forms the basis of ‘anti-aliasing’ –
smoothing jagged, pixelated edges.
Feathering is the most basic
implementation of gradient
selections in Photoshop. When
making a rigid selection using one
of the Marquee tools for instance,
you can tell Photoshop to make the
edge of the selection slightly soft, or
‘feathered’. This effectively creates
a border around the selection where
some of the pixels are partially
selected, smoothing whatever effect
or operation is applied to the
selection, or merely preventing
jagged edges.
The soft option
By making the feathered edge larger,
you’ll be able to create very soft
selections, and this is very useful when
making photo-montages, for instance,
or retouching images. We’ll look at
how anti-aliasing and feathering are
implemented in Photoshop’s selection
tools, and how you can use them to
achieve professional results quickly
and easily.
11ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Selections
Page 17The Magic Wand tool selects an
object in an image to change the colour
Page 20 Photoshop can convert
channels into selections and vice-versa
Page 18 Quick mask mode turns any
painting tool into a selection tool
Page 12The Circular Marquee tool
makes an elliptical selection
Page 13 Single Column marquees are
used to select only certain columns
Page 15The Magnetic Lasso lets you
make detailed selections with ease
Basic Selection tools
Let’s take a look at the various tools in the
toolbar available for making selections
12 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 1
Changing
marquees
Holding down the
[Alt] key will change
the marquee mode so
that the selection
expands from the
centre,rather than the
corners,as you drag.
Shifting around
Rather than using the
buttons you can hold
down modifier keys to
add and subtract
selections.To add,hold
the [Shift] key before
you begin to click and
drag.To subtract hold
the [Alt] key before you
click and drag.The
marquee cursor will
change to show which
mode you are in.
In Subtract mode, you can remove areas
from the current selection. Here we
changed to the Circle Marquee tool to
subtract an elliptical shape from the
rectangular selection we had made.You can
continue to make negative selections that
chip away at the current selection.This is a
good way to refine a selection to fit a specific
shape in an image.
4
The Options bar displays tool-specific
settings.The selection tools all have a set
of four buttons that change the effect that
subsequent selections have on the one that’s
currently active.The normal mode is New
Selection – each time you click and drag,a new
selection is made and the current one is lost.
Add mode makes the current selection larger
and a different shape.
3
The Circular Marquee works in exactly
the same way, except the selection will
be elliptical.With both tools you can constrain
the selection so it is either a perfect circle or a
perfect square by holding down the [Shift] key
while you drag. Lift your finger off the [Shift]
key while still holding the mouse button
down to switch back to unconstrained mode.
2
The Rectangular Marquee tool is the
first tool in the Toolbar, and is used to
select rectangular areas of an image. It’s
simple to use – just select the tool and drag
across the image to select the area you want.
By default the tools works in corner-to-corner
mode. Dragging from top-left or bottom-right
creates the marquee.
1
13ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Selections
Short intersection
To activate Intersect
mode without using
the buttons hold
down the [Alt} and
[Shift] keys before you
drag.
Perfect circle
If,after dragging while
holding down the [Shift]
key,you want to force
the selection to be
constrained to a perfect
circle or rectangle,
release the [Shift] key
momentarily and press
it again.Holding the
[Alt] key while dragging
will force a selection to
be drawn from its centre
as mentioned.
If already holding the
[Alt] key,such as when
using the Intersection
shortcut,momentarily
release it and then
press the [Alt] key.
This forces the
‘constraint from
centre’to occur.
Uses for the Single Row and Column
Marquees are varied, but not always
obvious. Here, they’re used to create multiple
random vertical and/or horizontal lines in an
image much more quickly than using the
Pencil or Line tool.The Add Selection mode
was used and the selections filled with black,
on separate layers, to create lines whose
opacity and blending mode we can vary.
8
The last two selection types in this tool
group are the Single Row and Single
Column Marquees.These are special types of
marquee which, as their name suggests, select
either a single row or column of pixels. In this
case dragging only defines which row or
column in the image is selected and the
selection extends to the edges of the image
in either mode.
7
This is the result of the intersection.
Note that it’s only the overlapping parts
of the two selections that remain selected.
This selection method is not used very often
but you’ll appreciate just how handy it can be
in certain situations. Creating similar
selections any other way would be very
difficult and time-consuming.
6
The fourth mode is Intersect.When in
this mode, you can create a new
selection that is the intersection between the
currently active one and one you will drag out.
Basically all parts of the current selection will
disappear except that portion that overlaps
with the new selection you drag out. Here is
the original selection with a new one being
dragged out over it, using the Intersect mode.
5
The Lasso tool is a free-form
selection tool. You can use it
like a pen to draw your selection
border by hand. When using the
Lasso tool selections can be any
shape you like, but it can be hard to
be precise because selection must be
drawn in a single motion. The
Polygonal Lasso is much easier to
use, and can be found in the Lasso
tool pop-up in the toolbar. This
enables you to click from one point
to another to create straight line
segments to make up your selection.
All you need to do is double-click,
or click on the starting point of the
selection to end it and consequently
close your selection.
The LassoTools
The standard,Polygonal and Magnetic Lassos
are ideal for creating complex selections
14 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 1
Using the [Alt] key technique allows you the best
of both worlds,drawing straight sections or
detailed curves as and when you need to
Poly-gone
When using the
Polygonal Lasso
holding down the
[Alt] key invokes the
normal Lasso tool.
Releasing the [Alt] key
reverts back to the
Polygonal Lasso.
Combined Lasso
With the Lasso tool
active,just hold down
the [Alt] key at any
stage to turn it into the
Polygonal Lasso.
THERE ARE two ways in which to work using the [Alt] shortcut.
Assuming you have the normal Lasso tool selected, if you keep the [Alt]
key held down when you click and drag, the tool will behave like the
normal Lasso.
IF YOU want to get really precise, then the Magnetic Lasso is the key.
With this selection tool you can draw close to the edge of the object you
wish to select and the tool will figure out where the boundary should be
and adjust the selection to fit.
YOU CAN set the Frequency high to place lots of points as you drag.
This can be handy for jagged edges.
A LOW Frequency is also useful when you don’t need the added
complexity of hundreds of anchor points, but can make do with a
less precise selection.
LASSO OPTIONS ROUNDED UP
The Magnetic Lasso
If you want detailed selections without too
much effort,here’s the perfect tool for the task
15ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Selections
Fast pan and zoom
You can use the Pan and
Zoom shortcuts to move
the image around while
still in mid-selection.See
Chapter 2 for more
about navigating and
editing your images.
Magnetic switch
Hold the [Alt] key to
activate the
Polygonal Lasso
tool when using the
Magnetic Lasso.
Another trick to help on very low
contrast portions of an image, such as
where the pumpkin stalk is in front of the girl’s
face again, it can help to increase the
Frequency setting.This will cause the tool to
place anchor points more often, therefore
reducing the span of pixels it has to analyze as
you drag the mouse.
4
This is a problem of contrast. By
reducing the Edge Contrast setting in
the Option bar you can help the Magnetic
Lasso to detect edges that are lower in
contrast. But you will still need to manually
add anchor points by clicking, to help the
Lasso do this.
3
If the area you are tracing is too
indistinct and low in contrast for
Photoshop to find an edge itself, you can click
the mouse to force an anchor point to be
placed.The default setting in the Options bar
is fine most of the time, but there can be
problems – here, the tool has no problem with
the edge of the hair, but it didn’t seem to
detect the pumpkin stalk.
2
This tool lets you make more detailed
selections, particularly of specific
objects in an image, without requiring too
much effort.You don’t have to keep the mouse
button held down when drawing either –
click once to start, drag close to the object
edge, then double-click to end. Note that the
tool automatically places‘anchor points’as
you draw to keep the selection in place.
1
The MagicWand
The Magic Wand is a special selection tool,
used for selecting areas of similar colour
16 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 1
Unrestricted
colours
When the Contiguous
setting in the Options
bar is checked,
Photoshop makes a
selection of similar-
coloured pixels that
are also physically
joined to your starting
point.Disable this
setting and similar
colour pixels across
the whole image will
be included,which
can take a few
moments.
Use All Layers
The Use All Layers
option allows you to
calculate the selection
based on how the
image actually
appears on screen
when working with
multi-layered
documents. If this is
left unchecked,then
only colours on the
currently selected
layer will be analysed
for similarity.
We can improve the ability of the wand
to select the colours we want by
increasing the Tolerance setting, from the
default 32, to 50 then [Shift]+clicking in each
of the separate areas. Any other parts of the
jumper still not selected can be added by
[Shift]+clicking on them again until you have
a good clean selection with no‘islands’.
4
The Magic Wand will only select colours
within a certain range, defined by the
Tolerance setting. And it will only look at
contiguous pixels – that is, ones that actually
touch each other. Areas of colour not directly
connected, like the chest and other arm, are
not considered for selection.
3
Most images don’t contain large areas of
flat colour like the one above,so here’s a
more typical use for the MagicWand – selecting
the girl’s jumper to change its colour.Using the
MagicWand,we can click on a section of the
jumper to select all pixels with a similar colour.
However,using the default setting there are
many‘islands’of unselected pixels,so not all of
the jumper has been selected.
2
The Magic Wand tool is used to select
areas using a single click.The tool works
by sampling the colour of the image where
you click and then looking at all adjacent
pixels for those that are the same or similar in
colour.Take a well-defined shape like the one
here and click in it with the Magic Wand – the
whole shape is selected in one go.
1
17ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Selections
Colour tweaks
The Hue/Saturation
panel lets you adjust
the whole spectrum
or individual sectors
of the colour
spectrum.Choose
these from the
pop-up menu.
Let it slide
The sliders at the
bottom of the
Hue/Saturation panel
enable you to adjust
the range of colours
affected in
each sector.
By selecting the layer mask and
applying the Gaussian Blur filter with a
smallish value we can make the layer mask
slightly bigger.Then by applying Levels to the
layer mask we can make the blurred edges
brighter, controlling how much of the
Hue/Saturation effect is applied to this area.
8
If we zoom into the document we can
see that there is a slight fringe of red.
This is because some of the jumper that
overlaps the background was left unselected.
This is a limitation of the tolerance setting
used by the Magic Wand. Fortunately, there is
a way we can fix this.
7
By adding a Hue/Saturation Adjustment
Layer while the selection is still active,
you can change the colour of the the jumper,
and only the jumper. Photoshop creates a
layer mask from the selection and uses is to
limit which areas of the adjustment layer will
actively affect the layers below.
6
Here you can see that a part of the arm
has been selected.This is due to the
high tolerance setting used.You can easily
remove it from the selection, but first reduce
the tolerance to a lower value, such as 24,
then [Alt]-click on the arm inside the selection
to remove it.
5
Quick Mask
Quick Mask is not a tool as such,but a mode
you can enter when working with selections
18 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 1
Fill the gaps
Holes in a Mask or
Quick Mask can be
filled by selecting the
inside or outside area
and applying the
Minimum filter.
Keep it sharp
Apply the Minimum
filter to a copy of a
layer using the
Overlay mode to
give you a‘live’
sharpening layer.
While in Quick Mask mode, therefore,
you can use any of the normal painting
tools to modify your mask, and hence your
selection.You can see that Photoshop offers a
huge amount of freedom when creating
selections, and this is indicative of how
important selections are when using
Photoshop. Here, the Paintbrush tool is being
used to clean up the mask.
4
The red overlay is slightly transparent
so you can see what it beneath. Red
areas are masked out (unselected) while
clear areas are unmasked (selected). But
internally, Photoshop stores the mask in
shades of grey, not red – so this is how the
mask looks to Photoshop.
3
By clicking the Quick Mask button at
the bottom of the toolbar, or pressing
the [Q] key, the selection is converted to a
mask.The mask is displayed, not in shades of
grey, but as a semi-transparent overlay.This
mimics the techniques used in traditional
printing where a red‘rubylith’overlay is used
to mask out parts of a photo or artwork.
2
When any selection is active,no matter
which of the selection tools you started
off using,you can enable Photoshop’s Quick
Mask mode.Here is a less-than-perfect
selection we have made using the Magic Wand.
1
When painting, take notice of
the foreground colour
indicated in the bottom of the
toolbar. When in Quick Mask mode
this will only indicate shades of
grey, so any colours you have set
will appear grey. Hitting the [D] key
sets the colours to the default, white
and black. As you paint you can use
the [X] key to reverse the background
and foreground colours so that you
can paint in white (unmask) or black
(mask) to edit the mask.
Once you have touched up the
mask, you can press the [Q] key
once more to exit Quick Mask
mode. You’ll then be able to convert
the edited mask to a selection.
Working with the Quick Mask
The Quick Mask lets you create a ready-made
mask,which you can edit or turn into a selection
19ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Selections
Make use of the foreground and background
switch key [X] to flip between masked and
unmasked colours
Disappearing ants
To hide the‘marching
ants’while a selection
is active use the
[Crtl]+[H] shortcut
(that’s
[Command]+[H]
for Mac users).Be
careful to remember
that you have a
selection active
though!
Hiding
applications
To hide other
applications on a Mac
and leave only
Photoshop visible,type
[Command]+[Alt]+[H].
On PCs,Photoshop has
an application
background window,
so this is not
applicable.
IF YOU need to make a selection slightly bigger all the way round, you
can do so using the Select > Modify > Expand menu command. A dialog
will appear in which you can enter the number of pixels by which you
wish to expand the selection.
YOU CAN contract a selection by using the Select > Modify > Contract
menu command.To make a selection larger by a specified number of
pixels around it, choose Select > Modify > Expand from the menu.
TO SOFTEN a selection and make its border less jagged, you can use
the Select > Feather menu command, enter a value in pixels (from 1 to
250) and click OK.
IF YOU need to modify just the border of the selection area you can
select it using the Select > Modify > Border.This is useful for creating
special edge effects, in combination with some filters, like Torn Edges.
HOW TO MODIFY YOUR SELECTIONS
Selections,Masks and Channels
Let’s look at selections in a little more detail to
see how how they relate to layers and channels
20 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 1
Alpha channels
The term alpha
channel simply means
any extra greyscale
channel saved along
with the three RGB
channels,or four CMYK
channels,that make up
a colour image file.
Photoshop files can
store many of these
alpha channels at once.
Channel selection
[Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Shift]+click
on a channel to load
the intersection of the
current selection
and a channel.
To reload a channel as a selection once
again,click the Load Channel As Selection
button at the bottom-left of the Channels palette.
A better technique is to press [Ctrl] (or
[Command] on a Mac) while clicking on the
channel icon directly – we can load the larger
ellipse as a selection (by pressing [Ctrl/Command]
while clicking on it) then subtract the smaller
ellipse by pressing [Ctrl/Command]+[Alt] while
clicking its icon in the Channel palette.
4
Now that the selection is saved as a
channel, we can drop the selection and
continue to make new ones. It’s only possible
to have one selection active at a time, so
saving them to a channel is a convenient way
to store them for use later on. Here we’ve
created another selection and saved it as
another channel. It’s just a larger ellipse.
3
We can convert the selection into an
‘alpha’channel by switching to the
Channels tab and clicking the Save Selection
As Channel button, (second from the left at
the bottom of the palette).The selection is
then represented by a greyscale image.
2
As we’ve seen with the Quick Mask
mode, selections are handled internally
by Photoshop as a greyscale image or‘mask’.
White areas in the mask are pixels that are
fully selected, black areas are fully unselected
and grey areas are partially selected. Let’s
create a simple selection using the Elliptical
Marquee tool.
1
Slices
Slices are special kinds of selections for web
page design,before the Image Ready stage
21ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Selections
Reassembled slices
When you save the
sliced page Photoshop
creates an HTML file
plus separate image files
for each slice.When the
HTML file is read by a
web browser all the
slices are reassembled in
their original position,
giving the appearance
of a single image
once again.
Keep it tidy
Hold the [Ctrl] key
while using the Slice
tool to toggle the Slice
Select tool on and off.
Use this to select a
slice and drag its edge
handles to resize it.Be
careful not to have
any unnecessary
‘sliver’slices between
the main slices.Zoom
in to check they all
butt up against each
other nicely.
Now choose File > Save ForWeb to open
Photoshop’s web compression tool.In
this panel,you can select each slice and apply
precisely the compression most suitable.For
example,a photo saved as high quality JPEG,
the text as a medium quality JPEG and the
graphics as GIFs.The backgrounds can be saved
as low quality JPEGs.This sliced,higher quality
image is only 5k larger than our first attempt.
4
Using the Slice tool we can divide up
the image into sections. It’s simple to
use – just select the tool and drag out
marquees to cut the image into appropriate
boxes. Photoshop automatically adds extra
slices where necessary to keep everything
rectangular because each slice essentially
becomes a separate image file.
3
The problem here is that the different
kinds of graphics element on the page
really need to be saved individually using the
compression settings best suited to each.
We can’t do this without using slices in
Photoshop. As this pretty extreme example
shows, achieving a small file size causes most
of the elements to look terrible.
2
Here’s an example of where slicing can
really help.This is an example web page,
containing text, a background, a photographic
image and graphics created in Photoshop.
Obviously, for the web we want the page to
download as fast as possible but also look as
good a possible.
1
Chapter 2
NAVIGATING
AND EDITING
YOUR IMAGES
Being able to zoom and pan an
image is important when
working on a Photoshop document.
Like all other aspects of the program
there is more than one way to get
around an image, manage your
windows and documents, and
generally navigate the Photoshop
landscape. Similarly you’ll need to
be able to work with the elements
within a document, such as masks,
layers, floating selections, paths and
vector masks. There are a number of
tools to accomplish these tasks.
As mentioned before, Photoshop is
not an object-based 2D program –
that is, you work directly with the
pixels of a layer until you explicitly
In this chapter…
Learn how to pan and
zoom images
Discover how to select
and move layer
elements
Use shortcuts to scale
and pan the view
Work more efficiently
and productively
Getting around inside an image is important if
you are to work quickly and efficiently.This
chapter covers the view navigation tools and
shortcuts for managing your workspace
do something to change that fact,
such as creating a new layer on
which to paint. In some 2D
programs, every time you paint a
stroke or apply an effect, a new
object is created. While this gives
you a totally non-destructive way of
image editing, it can make managing
your document a very complicated
procedure. In Photoshop it’s much
more straightforward.
Painting in layers
If you paint on an image layer, stop
say, to change colour, then paint over
what you just did, the result
destructively alters those pixels in
the layer. It’s much like painting in
the real world, except in Photoshop
you have an Undo command.
If you need to paint over the top of
existing artwork and be able to go
back and change the position, size,
colour and opacity of those strokes
later on, then you have to paint on a
new layer. This holds true for any
other aspect of the program where
new pixels are created.
While the Selection tools – the
Marquee, Lasso and so on – are used
to select pixels within a layer, there
are other tools for selecting and
moving layer elements themselves.
These include the Move tool, the
Path Select tool and the Direct
Selection tool for dealing with
vector-based elements. It’s important
to learn the difference between
them, and we’ll examine these
differences more closely in the
following pages.
Old and new
The Path Select and Direct Selection
tools are not easy to find in older
versions of Photoshop. The Path
Select tool used to be part of the Pen
tool group, but can now be found in
its own tool group on the toolbar.
Many revisions have been made to
both the menus and toolbar, but
rest assured that most of the
information in this book also applies
to older versions of Photoshop.
23ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Navigation and manipulation
Page 24 Use the Zoom and Pan tools
to navigate your images on screen
Page 25The Navigation palette is great
for giving an overview of the whole page
Page 26 Manage your screen space
when multiple documents are open
Page 31 Use the Direct Selection and
Path tools to work with paths and vectors
Page 29 Quick 3D effects are possible
using the Move tool in copy mode
Page 28The Move tool enables you to
navigate your layers with a pop-up menu
Panning and Zooming images
Here we show you the basic navigation tools
available for viewing your image
24 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 2
100% accuracy
To zoom the image so
that it is at exactly
100% scale,double-
click the Zoom tool
in the toolbar.
Viewing options
Use the buttons in the
Option bar to zoom
the image to full size,
print size or to make
it fit on screen.
Two useful options are the Resize
Window To Fit and Ignore Palettes
options in the Zoom tool’s Option bar.With
the former option enabled the window will
change size along with the image, and with
the latter option enabled the window will
continue to extend below any open palettes,
though not the toolbar.
4
To zoom out again, either click the
Zoom Out button in the Option bar and
click in the image, or hold down [Ctrl] and click
(that’s [Option]+click on a Mac). If the image
extends past the borders of the window you
can pan the image by clicking on the Pan tool,
or holding the Space Bar at any time and
dragging in the window.
3
At the bottom of the toolbar are the
Hand (which we’ll refer to as the Pan
tool) and Zoom tools. Click the Zoom tool
then click on your image to zoom in.
Eventually you’ll zoom in so far that the
individual pixels will become visible as large
blocks of a single colour.You’ve exceeded the
resolution limit for the image on your monitor,
but getting this close is often very useful.
2
When you open an image in Photoshop
it is automatically scaled so that the
whole image is visible at once.The scaling
factor is displayed as a percentage in the
window’s title bar. But how do you zoom in to
see more detail in a large image? As is often
the case when using Photoshop, there are a
number of different options.
1
The Navigator panel
A useful device for getting around documents
is the Navigator panel.Here’s how it works
25ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Navigation and manipulation
Navigator panel
This can be very
useful when working
on multiple monitor
set-ups.You can have
a full-screen preview
of your image on one
monitor while you
work up close on
another.This prevents
you continually
zooming in and out to
see how the editing
looks relative to the
rest of the image.
A different scale
Some previous
versions of Photoshop
do not allow
incremental and
fractional scaling –
you can only scale out
to 75%,50%,25%,
12.5%… or in to
125%,150%,200%
and so on.
The triangle at the top-right of the
Navigator accesses the options for the
panel.There are only two in Photoshop 7:
Dock To Palette Well and Options.The latter
lets you change the colour of the zoom box,
which can be handy if you have a very red
image like ours and the box is hard to see, of if
you just don’t like working with the red colour.
4
To zoom in and out using the Navigator
you have a few different options.You
can use the zoom slider to interactively zoom
the image, and that’s quite fun to do. Or you
can click on the Zoom In and Zoom Out
buttons either side of the slider. Or you can
click in the text field to enter an exact scale.
3
The Navigator panel is very useful when
zoomed in very close to an image,
because it shows you with a red box exactly
where in the main image the zoomed in
portion is located. Note that you can make the
preview larger by dragging the lower right
corner of the palette to resize it, even to fill the
whole screen.
2
From the Windows menu you can access
the Navigator panel, though it’s open by
default in Photoshop.This is a handy tool
because it enables you to view the entire
image in a small window, pan the main view,
and zoom in and out, all from the same small
area on screen. It’s great for those that don’t
like to use keyboard shortcuts.
1
The main interface in Photoshop
is quite simple and well laid-
out, but it has been constantly
refined through development to
offer highly efficient document and
view management. Within the main
menu is the View menu which has
many view management options –
the Zoom In and Out commands and
their respective shortcuts, as well as
commands to show the Rulers,
Guides and Grids and the option to
enable various kinds of snapping.
As well as using the Navigator or
Zoom tool you can use the shortcuts
[Ctrl]+[+] and [Ctrl]+[–] to zoom in
and out (Mac users replace [Ctrl]
with [Command]).
View management
Photoshop has several gadgets to help you
work with various views of your document
26 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 2
Multiple documents can be arranged on the
screen using Tile,in Windows > Documents.This
fits your images next to each other on screen
Floating away
The floating palettes
can get in that way,
especially if you are
working on a small
monitor.No matter,at
any time you can hit
the [F] key to toggle
the display mode to
full screen.Use the
Tab key to toggle the
palettes on and off to
get a totally
uncluttered view.
When the Zoom tool is
active the Options bar
displays a few extra buttons –
Actual Pixels,Fit On Screens
and Print Size.These zoom
the view to specific sizes.
The Navigator panel is
grouped with the Info
palette.Use the navigator to
perform multiple view
navigation tasks in one area,
with one hand.You also get a
handy image preview.
The Print Size pop-up is
located at the bottom of the
document window.Click on
the blank space here to
preview how large the image
will print out on the paper
size set in the Print dialog.
Yet another way to zoom
the document is to type in a
value here at the bottom-left
of the document window.
The Zoom and Pan tools
can be found at the bottom
of the toolbar.Click on these
to zoom and pan inside
the image.
At the bottom of the toolbar
are buttons to control full
screen view.The middle one
makes the current window fill
the screen,the right makes
the menu bar disappear and
the left returns it to normal.
ZOOMING AROUND
As well as moving and copying
pixels, Photoshop’s Move tool
allows you to align and distribute
objects evenly across the document
or within a selection. With the Move
tool selected you will see a number
of options available.
The first option, Auto Select
Layer, is very handy. It enables you
to click on a pixel in the image to
select that layer. The next, Show
Bounding Box, displays a transform
box around the selection or element
or layer. You can drag the handles on
the edge of the box to move the
selection. If you click on the lines,
you’ll switch to the Free Transform
mode, enabling you to scale, rotate
and deform the objects.
The next section of options only
becomes active when you have
linked layers. To link layers so that
you can move them as one object, go
to the Layers palette and click the
blank icon box between the eye icon
and one of your layers. A chain icon
now appears in the blank icon box,
indicating that the layer you have
just clicked next to is now linked to
the currently selected layer.
Move,Align and Distribute
The latest version of Photoshop has handy
Align and Distribute features
27ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Navigation and manipulation
Line them up
The Align features
work with selections
on fully filled layers
too.If a selection is
active then it is used
as a master guide for
all the layers to be
aligned to.If you have
accidentally moved
image layers so that
they lie partially off
the canvas you can
use the Align feature
to make them all line
up again squarely on
the canvas.
When you select a layer that has other layers linked to it the
Align and Distribute options of the Move tool become
active. Click on these to distribute the layers or align them to
various key points.You can use the Align Left Edges button,
for example, to align individual text layers so that their left
edges line up. It’s important to note that these options only
take into account the bounding box of the layer. If you have
a series of layers linked together but they are filled totally
with pixels, then the align options will have no effect.This is
because the layers have nowhere to be aligned to, as they
are already lined up on the canvas.
ACTIVATING ALIGN AND DISTRIBUTE
Feel like going MAD? Here’s how to Move,Align and Distribute
The Align and Distribute buttons in
the Move options bar can be used to
align multiple linked layers
The Move tool
The Move tool is a very handy,multi-purpose
gadget – and surprisingly easy to use
28 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 2
On the Move
Atanytime,nomatter
whattoolisselected,
youcan accessthe
Movetoolbypressing
[V]onyourkeyboard.
Scissor action
The Move tool cursor
displays a pair of
scissors next to it
when it is over an
active selection.
If a selection is active then the Move
tool will move the pixels in the selection
only, as opposed to the whole layer. Here
we’ve selected the whole object in a flattened
document and dragged it.The result is that
the pixels are lifted and moved, leaving a
hole behind.
4
You can scroll your mouse through the
list to select precisely the right layer you
want to move without having to go to the
Layers palette. Here we’ve selected the
Wireframe layer, and moved it. Getting into
the habit of naming your layers will help here.
3
The neat thing about the Move tool is
that it has a built-in layer navigation
feature. In a multi-layer document you can
find out exactly which layers are beneath any
given point in an image by control-clicking
and holding on the image. A menu will pop up
displaying the names of the layers in order,
from the top downwards.
2
The Move tool is the second tool at the
top of the toolbar. It looks like an arrow
but without the tail. Use this tool when you
want to move elements in a document, be
they selected pixels or whole layers.
1
29ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Navigation and manipulation
Extrude and move
In the 3D text example
on the left,we first
created a text layer,
then loaded it as a
selection by command
clicking the layer.In a
new layer below the
text layer we created a
gradient through the
selection,and with it
still active we carried
out an extrude-
move function.
Computer Arts
To discover even more
ways to develop your
Photoshop skills,
check out our sister
magazine,
Computer Arts.
You can find the
magazine’s website at
www.computerarts.co.uk.
A nifty trick is to hold down the [Alt] key
and use the arrow keys to nudge the
selection diagonally. Used on a text outline
filled with a gradient like this, repeatedly
pressing the Up and Right Arrow keys creates
an extruded 3D object.
8
Another way to do this is to create a
new layer from the selection first, then
use the Move tool as normal.With a selection
active press [Ctrl] + [J] (that’s [Command] + [J]
on a Mac) to convert the selection to a new
layer, then move it as normal.
7
Now as you drag the selection will be
copied, lifted and moved to another
location on the layer. Note that while the
selection is still active the copied pixels
occupy a quasi-layer.This is said to be
‘floating’selection.You can move it around
as if it was on its own layer. Only when you
deselect the pixels will it be dropped on to
the layer.
6
Moving pixels and leaving a hole behind
may be fine in some circumstances but if
you want to copy the pixels instead of cutting
them out then you have to hold down the [Alt]
key (often called the‘Option’key on a Mac,
although it’s still labelled‘Alt’) as you drag with
the Move tool. Notice that the cursor will
change to a double arrow, indicating you’re
now in Copy mode.
5
Direct and Path Selection tools
Use the Path Selection and Direct Selection
tools to move and edit paths and vector shapes
30 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 2
A familiar Path
The Path Selection
tool is much like the
old arrow cursor in
the Pen tool group of
previous versions of
Photoshop,before
vector shapes
and masks
were introduced.
Hide and seek
You can show and
hide the path outlines
by typing
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[H],on
your keyboard (that’s
[Command]
+[Shift]+[H] for Mac
users) or toggling the
Views > Show >
Target Pathsmenu
command on and off.
With both paths selected you can click
on the Combine button in the Path
Selection’s Option bar to merge both (or as
many as you like) into a single path. If you click
away from the paths to deselect them, then
reselect them, you’ll see that all the paths are
now selected because they are one.
4
Much like other selections in Photoshop
you can add to them using the [Shift]
key. Here we have selected both paths by
[Shift]-clicking on the second path to activate
it. Both can now be transformed together.
However, to make this work you must have
the Show Bounding Box option turned off.
3
For this we need to activate the Path
Selection tool.This is in the eighth row
of the toolbar and looks like a black arrow
cursor.With this selected, clicking on the
edges of each path in the vector mask selects
it.We are able to move the path and transform
it to fit by making the bounding box visible
and clicking on the edge of the box to activate
Free Transform.
2
Here we have two vector shapes in a
single vector mask applied to a Solid
Colour layer.They are not properly aligned
and we need to select them independently,
but how? The Move tool only lets us move
the whole layer, so we’re not able to select
the paths independently.
1
Vectorshapesandmultiplepaths
Follow our step-by-step guide to working
on vector shapes and multiple paths
31ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Navigation and manipulation
Take the A road
The [A] key is the
shortcut to the Path
Selection tool group.
To toggle between
Path and Direct
Selection mode type
[Shift]+[A].
Make a point
Clicking once on a
point that already has
handles with the Cusp
cursor converts it to a
sharp point with
no handles.
With the Direct Selection tool you can
select a point in order to access its
Bezier handles and modify the shape of the
curve. If a point has no handles you can pull
them out by holding down [Ctrl]+[Alt] as you
drag ([Command]+[Alt] on a Mac).The tool
changes to an inverted‘V’,called the Cusp tool.
4
With either the Direct Selection or Path
Selection tools active you can duplicate
a path,or multiple paths by [Option]+dragging
them.The cursor will change to display a plus
sign next to it when you hold the Option key
down as a visual cue that you are about to
make a copy.
3
If you need to select multiple points on
a path and move them as one you can
drag out a marquee with the Direct Selection
tool. Alternatively the usual‘shift to add’
maxim holds true: [Shift]+click to add points
to the selection that are difficult to select
within a single marquee.
2
If you want to edit the points of a vector
shape mask then you need to change
from the Path Selection to the Direct Selection
tool.With this tool active, you are able to
click to select individual points in a path or
vector shape.
1
Chapter 3
USING THE
BRUSHES AND
PENCIL TOOLS
Photoshop is traditionally known
for image manipulation,
retouching, effects and colour
correction, but not so much as a
painter’s tool. This has partly been
due to the fact that the artistic
capabilities of the program were
severely limited due to the poor
support for artistic media
simulation. Other programs such as
Corel Painter used to lead the market
here, but the last few versions of
Photoshop has seen it’s Brushes
system completely overhauled,
making it much more useful as an
artistic media program.
Having said that, Brushes have
always been essential for just about
In this chapter…
Using the Brush and
Pencil tools
Editing and saving
brush properties
Creating custom
brush tips
Using the History and
Art History brush
This chapter introduces you to Photoshop’s
more arty tools,the Brushes.However,as we’ll
see,you can use these versatile tools for far
more than just painting
everything else in Photoshop, and
getting the most out of the Brush
tools involves finding out all the
little secrets and features buried
inside the program. Actually they’re
not that secret but its surprising how
few of the shortcuts some Photoshop
users know. It’s usually those who
have been using it since the early
days that know all the best tips.
Spoilt for choice
In a way, the later, feature-rich
versions spoil you by giving you so
many options to work with. The
History palette, introduced in
version 5, is a fantastic time-saving
device. It’s also an incredible feature
that takes the basic Photoshop
functions and multiplies their
capabilities tenfold. The History
palette essentially adds a kind of
non-linear undo to the program.
Previously undo was limited to just
hopping back step-by-step. The
History palette displays all your
operations (up to a maximum
number that you specify) in a list,
complete with the tool used and its
icon. By clicking on any of these
steps you can immediately jump
straight back to the document as it
was at that point in time.
Even more impressive is the
ability to store permanent snapshots
of the state of the document at any
time. These will not ‘fall off the
back’ like items in the undo list
would when the list exceeded the
number of steps set in the
Preferences. However all this power
and flexibility comes at a cost:
disk space. The History states can
consume very large amounts of
‘scratch disk’ space, the random
storage bin that Photoshop uses as a
kind of virtual memory.
Performance figures
Keep a large amount of hard disk
space free for Photoshop – as much
as 2 to 4GB if working on large
images. Ideally, partition your disk
and dedicate one part to Photoshop.
33ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Brushes and Pencil tools
Page 41 Dual Brushes offer the user
unprecedented levels of detail
Page 45The Art History Brush allows
you to turn an image into a painting
Page 34 Photoshop’s brush editing
system gets the most from Brush tools
Page 35 Access Photoshop’s hidden
extras for more versatility
Page 36 Learn about the importance of
Spacing,Flow and Opacity for brushes
Page 43The History Brush offers
superb photo manipulation options
The Brush tool can be found in
the fourth row of Photoshop’s
toolbar. When selected, the options
bar displays quite a few settings for
the current Brush such as Opacity,
Flow and whether it is in Airbrush
mode or not. There are also pull-
down menus for the Apply mode,
Brush Shape preset and the new
Brush Editing palette.
Brushes are used to apply coloured
pixels to an image. They take their
colour from the current Foreground
Colour swatch. The Colour palette
can be used to choose colours in a
number of different ways – by using
the small gradient strip at the base,
the sliders or the Swatch tab.
The Brush tool
Brushes offer some of Photoshop’s most
flexible features.So where can you find them?
34 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 3
The Color palette lets you choose colours in
various ways – via a gradient strip,sliders or
swatches,which are located in their own tab
Back and forth
You can set two
colours,a foreground
and background
colour,and switch
between them while
painting with the
Brush tool by pressing
the [X] key.
The Brush presets are
located here at the top-left of
the Options palette when the
Brush tool is selected.
The Brushes palette can be
accessed by clicking this icon
in the Brush tool’s Option bar.
The basic Brush settings,
such as Size,Shape and
Angle as well as the spacing
control can be accessed by
clicking the Brush Tip Shape
section at the top,the
controls of which display at
the bottom of the palette.
The Brushes palette is very
versatile but can seem a bit
complicated at first.It’s far
more advanced than in
previous versions.
Choose the display option
for the presets from the
preset menu.You can display
the presets as a list or as
icons if you prefer.
The panel can be
expanded by dragging the
bottom-right corner.
THE BRUSH INTERFACE AND CONTROLS
Using Brushes
There is a huge range of customisable and
preset brushes.Here’s how to use them
35ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Brushes and Pencil tools
The key to opacity
You can also reduce
opacity using the
numeric key pad.
Pressing the 0 key sets
the opacity to 100%,
while pressing the [5]
key sets the opacity to
50%.Pressing the [1]
numeric key sets the
opacity to 10%
and so on.
Nimble numeracy
To get an intermediate
opacity value like 15%,
type 1 followed
quickly by 5 on the
numeric keypad.
In this case the paint‘builds’,
accumulating opacity the more and
more you paint.This is very useful for building
up tones and colours in an image gradually.
You can see the effect clearly here.Where the
strokes double back and cross each other the
colour intensifies.The downside is that the
individual‘dabs’are also visible.
4
Flow is like opacity but is a dynamic
property.Whereas opacity sets a value
for the maximum amount of opacity, Flow sets
the minimum amount.With the Flow setting
very low, say 10%, and opacity set to full, you
can paint with what seems like a low opacity,
except when you paint over the strokes you
have just applied.
3
The Opacity of the brush defines how
transparent the paint is – that is, how
much of the colour underneath shows
through the paint. By default it is set to 100%,
but you can reduce this using the Opacity
slider in the Options bar.
2
Once you select the Brush tool you can
choose a Brush Shape from the Brush
preset drop-down menu in the Options bar.
Each preset is saved at a given size, indicated
below the brush preview icon in the preset
list.You can alter this by dragging the master
diameter slider.
1
Using Brushes continued
36 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 3
Brush size shortcut
You can change the
brush size up and down
in 10 point increments
using the square
bracket keys [ and ].
More shortcuts
On this month’s CD
you’ll find PDF files
that contain all the
possible keyboard
shortcuts for both PCs
and Apple Macs..
You can also turn Spacing off using
the check-box in the Brushes palette.
When it’s off, Photoshop applies spacing
depending on how quickly you draw your
stroke.This can be good or bad, depending
what you want the stroke to look like.
8
In order to counteract this effect, you
need to use an even lower Flow setting.
Here the flow has been reduced to 3% for a
5% spacing value.You can see that the strokes
appear much smoother and build nicely as we
apply more paint.
7
By reducing the Spacing you can get
better results when using a low Flow
setting. Here the Spacing is reduced to 5%,
which means each dab overlaps by 95% of its
diameter.This results in a much smoother
stroke, but its also more opaque, as the brush
tends to‘self build’.
6
This brings us on to the Brushes palette,
which is opened by clicking the icon at
the top-right of the Options bar.The palette
contains a setting called Spacing.This controls
how frequently Photoshop places a‘dab’of
paint as you drag the brush.The default
setting of 25% makes each dab overlap the
next by three quarters of its diameter.
Here’s the result from a low Flow setting.
5
37ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Brushes and Pencil tools
Brush shortcuts
Lots of Photoshop’s
tools use the same
brushes interface.You
can use the same
shortcuts to change
brush size and pop up
the preset panel with
any of them.Take a
look at the PDF files
included on the CD for
a full list of shortcuts
for both PC and Mac.
Straight ahead
To paint perfectly
straight lines click
once to place the star
point of the stroke
then shift-click
elsewhere.A straight
stroke will joint the
two points.
Also, while painting you can choose a
new colour from the image by holding
down the [Alt] key.The Brush tool changes to
the Eye Dropper, allowing you to sample a
colour from any pixel.
12
When painting an image using brushes
it can be a chore moving to the Options
bar to change brush size and shape. However
the preset pop-up is available right beneath
your mouse if you right-click in your image.
Mac users should hold down [Ctrl] and click
for the same effect.
11
Soft brushes are very useful especially
when used with other tools such as the
Rubber Stamp, which uses the same brush
interface as the Brush tool. A Hardness of
100% is not totally hard, however.There is still
some edge smoothing because of the effect
of‘anti-aliasing’(on the right stroke). If you
want a totally hard brush (left stroke) switch
to the Pencil tool.
10
Other brush properties include
Hardness.This defines how sharp the
edges of the brush are and can be varied from
0 to 100% in the Brushes panel.The brush on
the left has a hardness of 100% while the one
on the right has a Hardness of 0%.They are
exactly the same diameter, but notice that the
soft brush seems smaller because its edges
are less opaque.
9
The Brushes palette is where it
all happens. It’s Photoshop’s
answer to its previous lack of natural
media tools. In truth, it’s not really a
natural media simulation system, but
rather an extension of the brush
dynamics features that previous
versions of the program already had.
When you open the Brushes
palette you are faced with an
overwhelming array of controls and
they do take a while to become
familiar with. Most of the controls
are to do with the ‘dynamics’ of the
brushes – how the brush properties
vary during use. Photoshop allows
you to set the various properties,
such as scattering, colour and hue
variation. These can stay fixed,
respond to cursor speed or fade over
a pre-defined distance. This gives
you a large additional range of
natural, organic variances to your
brush strokes which would not
otherwise be possible with a mouse.
However, to get the most from the
brush dynamics, and experience
their intuitive ‘feel’, you should
really invest in a graphics tablet and
pen, such as the Wacom Intuos.
Exploring the Brushes palette
The basics of the Brushes palette and presets
and how they affect the look of your strokes
38 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 3
Take a tablet
With a graphics tablet
attached,the brush
parameters can
respond to pen
pressure,speed and tilt
(if supported).The
result is that you can
create brushes that are
responsive to your
touch and work more
like real artists tools.
But you can also set up
the dynamics so that
the brushes perform in
a totally unnatural way
too,if you wish.
Brush shape is the final part of the jigsaw when creating and
editing brushes.The standard brushes offer a circular shape
that can be hard or soft, round or oval and rotated at any
angle. But there are a number of special brushes that are
more graphic in nature.These can be selected from the
Preset menu and there are many more that come with
Photoshop but are not loaded by default.To load a preset
library choose one from the Brush preset panel menu (the
triangle at the top-right).You are then asked to Replace or
Append the current list. Append adds the selected library
to the current list of brushes, rather than replacing it.
CHOOSING YOUR BRUSH SHAPE
Having the right brush shape for the task is the key to success
The preset brush libraries have many
different brush shapes.The menu is at
the top-right of the preset brush pop-up
There are 13 sections in the
Brushes palette, displayed in a
list down the left-hand side. The first
of these is the Presets section –
essentially a duplicate of the Preset
pull-down menu in the Option bar.
You can choose a brush preset from
the list, or load new ones from the
pop-up menu at the top-right of the
palette. At the bottom is a preview
of how the current brush stroke
would behave, and above that is the
Master Diameter slider. At the very
bottom are the New Brush and
Delete buttons. Clicking the New
Brush button creates a new preset,
which you can name and save to
reuse another time.
The Brushes palette in detail
Having seen the Brush palette’s potential,let’s
delve deeper into the Brush Preset features
39ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Brushes and Pencil tools
The Brush Presets section at the very top stores
complete brush settings,including the type of
tip shape and the dynamics settings
Saving your presets
You can save the
currently loaded set of
presets as a library
using the Save Brushes
command in the pop-
up menu at the
top-right corner of the
palette.The library is
saved as a .abr file,
which only Photoshop
can read.
Size Jitter – Controls the
variation in size of the dabs in
a stroke.The higher the value,
the greater the variation.
Minimum – Sets the
smallest size the brush will
reach when it is jittered.
Control – These menus
define what dynamics
attribute controls the
parameter.Fade reduces the
effect of the parameter over a
certain distance,entered in
the numeric field.Other
options are Off,Pen Tilt,Pen
Pressure and Stylus Wheel.
Minimum Roundness –
Sets the minimum value that
is reached when randomly
jittering the Roundness.
Tilt Scale – Enabled when
the Pen Tilt option is selected
in the Control pop-up.
Adjusts the tilting sensitivity.
Angle Jitter – If the brush is
asymmetrical you can jitter
the angle of the dabs,but not
on a perfectly round brush.
Roundness jitter – This tool
randomly alters the amount
a brush is squashed or
‘rounded’on one axis.
THE TOOLS OF BRUSH DYNAMICS
Scattering
Scattering is a great way of adding random
brush strokes to images.Here’s how it works
40 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 3
Better late
than never
Brushes in later
versions of Photoshop
have more options to
control their behaviour.
If you’re using an older
version you may find
that some of the
features that we’ve
mentioned do
not apply.
Scatter effects
Wide Scatter settings
can be used to create
random but even
variation in tone or
colour on your
artwork.Use it with
selections to control
the placement
of the effect.
Count Jitter simply varies the number in
the Count setting per dab, and is not
very noticeable in most situations. Note that
there are Control pop-ups in the Scatter
section so you can link the parameters to
graphics pen tilt, pressure and scroll wheel,
or fake the effect of distance.
4
The Count slider multiplies each dab by
the number shown. instead of a single
dab, a setting of 5 in the Count slider will
produce five times as many dabs, each of
which may be scattered. Because it increases
the density of the brush dabs you may want to
lower the Flow setting of the brush.
3
When the Both Axes option is enabled
the scattering takes place perpendicular
to the stroke and along it. Most of the time
you’d leave this option off, unless you want a
very randomized stroke, almost like a spray.
2
The Scattering section is great fun.This
adds a random scattering of the dabs
and is a great way to add random, organic
strokes to images.The Scatter slider controls
the amount of scattering perpendicular to the
stroke direction.
1
Textures and Dual Brushes
Achieve seriously complex brush effects with
additional features of the Brushes palette
41ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Brushes and Pencil tools
Precise strokes
Don’t forget gradient
selections are a great
way to control where
‘paint’will go on an
image.You can blend
or fade away your
strokes very precisely
using these gradients.
Go easy
Dual brushes are the
key to getting more
detailed brush strokes
in less time.They are
more suited,however,to
be used sparsely rather
than as dense strokes.
Enabling Scattering
is a good idea.
Enabling all of the numerous other
settings and it becomes like playing
with wet paint, and great fun. It only takes
seconds to spray the canvas with incredibly
detailed patterns and colours, and work them
together like real paint.
4
Colour Dynamics takes the concept of
scattering and jitter but applies it to the
colour properties of a brush.You can achieve
very complex and detailed strokes using the
settings in this section.
3
Enabling the Dual Brush option makes
things really interesting.This feature
adds a second brush tip to texture the main
one. It has its own Spacing, Size, Scattering
and Count settings and is mixed in using an
Apply mode chosen from the pop-up menu at
the top of the panel.
2
The rest of the parameters are operated
in much the same way as the Scattering
section that we looked at in detail.The best
thing to do is to experiment with the settings
by playing around with them. Here the Texture
section is enabled.This lets you add texture
to the brush tip using one of Photoshop’s
preset textures.
1
The History Brush seems a bit
of a mysterious tool in the
Photoshop toolbox for both
newcomer and veteran alike, and for
that reason is one that often gets
overlooked. This is usually because
veteran Photoshoppers have got used
to the way Photoshop used to work
before the advent of the History
Brush and old habits die hard.
But it’s worth getting to know this
unusual tool because, together with
its indispensable partner the History
palette, it should turn out to be a
total delight to any newcomer.
Every time you perform an action,
such as painting a stroke, applying a
filter, or deleting a layer, that step is
stored in the History palette as a
‘state’. By clicking on any of these,
you can return your document to the
state it was in at that point. Now,
here’s the best bit – by clicking on
the small icon box next to a history
state in the History palette, you
earmark that layer as the source for
the History Brush. When you then
paint on the image with the History
Brush only those pixels will be
returned back to the earmarked state.
The History Brush
Discover Photoshop’s secret weapon for
retouching and photo manipulation
42 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 3
Step back in
History
The History Brush lets
you paint previous
states of the current
document over the
current state.This
makes it a powerful
tool for selectively
applying filters
to an image.
Photoshop 5 onwards has two kinds of undo.There’s the
normal [Ctrl]+[Z] undo ([Command]+[Z] on a Mac), which
undoes and redoes the last action you performed.This can
be handy to flip back and forth, checking the result of your
last action.There is also History.You can step backwards in
History using [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Z] (that’s [Command]+[Alt]+[Z] for
Mac users). By repeatedly pressing this shortcut, you step
back further and further through the history.To go forwards
again press [Ctrl/Command]+[Shift]+[Z]. Set the number of
states stored in History by going to Preferences > General
and entering a new number in the History States field.
HISTORY AND UNDO
So what’s the difference between Undo and History?
You can set Photoshop’s maximum
number of History states from the
General section in Preferences
Using the History Brush
The History Brush is a powerful and flexible
tool,but has all the simplicity of a normal brush
43ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Brushes and Pencil tools
Size does matter
To paint with History
states the source state
must be the same size
as the current
document.if you
resized an image you
will not be able to use
any states prior to
that as a source for
the History Brush.
United states
In order to paint with
History states,the
source state must also
be the same colour
space.If you changed
this you will not be
able to use any states
prior to that point as
a source for the
History Brush.
Now we can change the History source
to the Inverted state, select the History
tool and a fancy brush and paint.Wherever we
paint the pixels in the image will be inverted.
Obviously you can use this technique with any
effect, filter or adjustment you like.
4
We want to get the image back as is was
so that we can selectively invert it, but
undoing the last step also clears the state
from the History, which is no good. Instead we
mark the uninverted state as a History source.
Choose Edit > Fill and set the Fill mode to
History, et voilá, back to normal but with
History intact.
3
Typing [Ctrl/Command]+[I] inverts the
image, turning the shades and colours
to their opposites.This will be be the basis for
the effect we want to achieve using the
History Brush, and it has been saved as a state
in the History palette.
2
A good use of the History Brush is to
apply an effect to an image in localised
areas without the need to construct a mask or
selection first. Here’s our starting image to
which we want to apply some special effects.
First of all we resized it to make it a bit smaller.
1
Using the History Brush continued
44 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 3
Filter tip
You can use this same
technique of Brushing
using History to
selectively apply any
filter to an image.
Early edits
In earlier versions of
Photoshop you could
open part of a large
image and edit it,
placing the edited
part back into the
large image once
finished.That was in
the days when RAM
was expensive.
Now we select the Gaussian Blur state
as the source for the History Brush and
paint in the image precisely where we want it
to be blurred, leaving the unblurred pixels
intact to create a forced‘depth of focus’effect.
8
Now we return the image to its original
state by selecting the unblurred state as
the History source then using the Edit > Fill
command set to History mode.
7
So, we follow the same steps as before
except this time we blur the whole
image by Applying the Gaussian Blur filter
instead of inverting it.
6
Here’s another example of the same
technique.We’ll use History to fake a
‘depth of field’blur effect on this 3D image.
Normally you might do this using a depth
render as a mask, but what if you forgot to
save one?
5
Art History Brush
The History Brush has an even more creative
cousin – meet the Art History Brush
45ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Brushes and Pencil tools
Historic detail
Even if the detail has
been obliterated,you
can bring it back by
using a smaller brush,
because the original,
untouched image is
used as the source.
Pick a mode
The Art History Brush
can be applied in
different blending
modes: Darken,
Lighten,Hue,Colour,
Saturation
and Luminosity.
You can carry on adding details back,
changing brushes and styles until you
get the result you want. Here we went back
and lightened the original image then used
this as the source, enabling us to add in some
detail in the darker part of the face.
4
That blocks out the image nicely. Now
we can paint some of the finer details
back in. Changing the brush to a much smaller
radius lets you add back some details, but you
can do this only to certain areas.We’ve used a
3-pixel brush, and the Loose Medium Style
from the History Brush’s Options bar.
3
Here’s how it works. Open any photo,
preferably one that will work well as a
painting.You don’t need to perform any
action to set things up, just select the current
state as the History Source and select the
Art History Brush.We used the Impressionist
preset from the pop-up menu at the very
top-left of the Options bar and painted over
the image.
2
The Art History Brush is one of those
bizarre but fun features Adobe comes
up with once in a while. Basically, it is used to
convert any image into one that looks hand-
painted.The original photo is on the left, and
the Art History conversion on the right.
1
Chapter 4
USING THE
CLONING AND
HEALING TOOLS
Cloning is a very simple and
obvious concept in image
manipulation. Take pixels from over
here and duplicate them over there.
That’s really all there is to it. The
Clone tool, also known as the
Rubber Stamp, is Photoshop’s
implementation of this technique
and offers you a great deal of power
for retouching images.
The tool works by ‘sampling’
pixels at one location in an image,
or even in a different document
altogether, and painting them in a
different location using what is
essentially a brush. The Clone tool
offers most of the properties of the
normal Brush tool – size, hardness,
In this chapter…
Learn how to wield the
Clone tool (Rubber
Stamp) like a pro
Using blending modes
to get better results
when cloning difficult
textures like skin
Learn how to clone
pixels between
documents
Working with the
Healing and Patch
tools to improve
portraits and photos
Perform special
effects and image
manipulation tricks
using Cloning
The Cloning and Healing tools in Photoshop
offer an elegant way to fix damaged photos,
correct bad scans and generally clean up
your images.They’re great fun to use too
tip shapes, dynamics and blending
modes, but applies these to cloning.
In addition to these the Clone tool
lets you clone not only pixels from a
single layer but from the whole of a
multi-layered document. This can be
a very powerful feature for advanced
users but can cause problems if you
don’t keep your wits about you.
Seamless sampling
When sampling pixels from a multi-
layered, composite image you must
be aware of any Adjustment layers
present. If you sample a composite
image with say, a Hue/Saturation
Adjustment layer applied to it,
boosting the saturation, cloning on
to layers below this adjustment layer
will result in the cloned pixels being
boosted twice. If your intention is to
have a seamless result, your hopes
will be dashed, so it always pays to
be aware of this.
In version 7 of Photoshop, Adobe
introduced a tool that takes the
concept of cloning to the next level
in terms of ease of use, known as the
Healing tool. Cloning is a great tool
to have but as we saw earlier, it can
take some effort to get a seamless
result, especially when the sample
point pickings are slim and when
dealing with multi-layered images.
It can take quite a bit of practice to
achieve smooth results.
Healing, however, lets you clone
pixels over a problem area but rather
than simply overlaying them, as the
Clone tool does, it blends them with
those they are replacing, using some
clever algorithms.
Skin care
As you may have guessed, the
upshot of such technology is that
you don’t need to be nearly so
careful in your cloning – when
blending the blemishes on the face
of a subject in a portrait, for
example. The Healing tool will
intelligently blend the pixels to get
the best result (at least most of the
time), which works well on skin.
47ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Cloning and Healing tools
Page 52The new Healing tool can
make someone look years younger
Page 51 Revive damaged photos and
images with cloning techniques
Page 53The Healing Patch tool is a
great way to fix up photos
Page 48 Cloning copies parts of your
image and transplants them elsewhere
Page 49The Clone tool can remove
unwanted parts of an image
Page 50 Less-than-perfect portraits
can be fixed up in seconds
The Rubber Stamp (Clone) tool
The Rubber Stamp tool is useful for copying
pixels from one part of an image to another
48 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 4
Sample mode
When you hold the [Alt]
key down the Clone
cursor changes from
the brush outline to
crosshairs to show that
it’s in sample mode and
allowing more
precise sampling.
Precision painting
Use the Caps Lock key
on any brush tool to
activate Precise
Cursor mode.
Now we can clone the boy. Releasing
the [Option] key returns to normal
cloning mode.We can clone over the face of
the boy at the top-right, replacing his with the
face of the boy from the lower-left.We can
carry on and make as many clones as we like.
4
Selecting a 20-pixel soft brush we first
set the Sample point from which to
clone.To do this we hold down the [Alt] key
and click where we want to sample from – in
this case the face of the boy in the lower-right
of the photo.
3
To ensure that we can easily return to
the original if necessary, we first make a
copy of the image as a new layer. Selecting the
Clone tool we can see the Options bar looks
much like the Brush tool’s. At the far right are
two extra options though: Aligned and Use
All Layers.Turn off the Aligned check-box.
2
Let’s focus on the more creative and fun
aspects. Here’s a great example of what
cloning is all about – our source image is a
typical group portrait.
1
Removing unwanted elements
Cloning is ideal when you need to seamlessly
eradicate an unwanted part of an image
49ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Cloning and Healing tools
In the right
measure
Use the Measure tool
to drag along the top
edge of one of the
bench slats to read its
angle,then use the
Edit >Transform >
Rotate command.The
angle that you
just found will
automatically be
entered in the
rotation field.
Online tutorials
You’ll find a host of
handy tutorials to help
you take your
Photoshop skills further
at the website of our
sister magazine,
Computer Arts.
www.computerarts.co.uk
With a bit of effort we can remove the
man entirely from the image. Note that
to do this successfully we need to stop when
the alignment of the image begins to drift,
and take a new sample point.
4
It sort of works but the cloned part of
the bench does not line up properly
with the original.To fix this we can undo the
cloning, rotate the image slightly so that the
slats are horizontal, and clone again.This time
they line up.
3
This time we make sure the Aligned
option is enabled.This allows us to use
multiple strokes, and to maintain the offset so
that the cloning is consistent. In a duplicate
layer we set the sample point on to the middle
of the park bench and begin cloning out the
man on the left.
2
Another great use for cloning is for
removing objects from a picture. Here’s
an example image. Perhaps you wanted to use
the image with some text overlaid on one side,
or you just need to change the composition.
1
One of the most common uses
of the Clone tool is to fix
blemishes, bruises and marks on
skin. If you want to fix marks on the
skin such as a rash or the occasional
spot you can easily clone it out using
the Clone tool as normal. While
you’ll remove the blemish you’ll
probably find it very difficult to get
a seamless clone. What tends to
happen is that the clone will be
slightly the wrong shade or colour,
so that when you zoom out to
inspect the whole image, the cloned
point is almost as visible as the
original blemish, which defeats the
whole point of removing the blemish
in the first place!
Cloning Skin
You can fix problem portraits in seconds using
the Clone tool and its subtle blending mode
50 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 4
Fixing skin in photos is easy,once you know that
the secret is simply to change the Clone tool’s
blending mode and subtly clone out the marks
A cloning
alternative
An alternative
technique,which uses
the same principal,is
to clone on to a new
layer using the
Normal mode but set
the layer’s blending
mode to Colour
or Luminosity.
Less is more
Using a low opacity
allows you to clone
away blemishes
gradually.
You don’t always
need to eradicate
blemishes totally.In
fact,doing so can
look too fake.Instead
just reduce their
intensity a little.
CLONING SKIN correctly requires careful use of the brush blending
modes. In the Options bar set the blending mode in the drop-down
menu to Luminosity and the opacity to 50%.You can then clone the
image using only the brightness of the sampled point.This lets you get
rid of light or dark blemishes easily, without changing the colour.
IF THE blemish is a red patch of skin or bruise, set the blending mode to
Colour before you clone.That way the brightness of the pixels remains
the same, but the off-colour will be removed.
MAKING USE of both apply modes in turn is likely to be the best
option for very bad marks like cuts and bruises.This allows you to deal
with the colour and brightness independently.
WITH BOTH methods try to keep the sample point as close as you can
to the problem area to minimize the difference in skin tone.
THE TRICKS FOR SKIN CLONING REVEALED
The Healing Brush
No time to fuss with the Clone tool? Then fix
up an image with the Healing Brush instead
51ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Cloning and Healing tools
Extreme healing
The same technique
of setting the
blending mode to
either Colour or
Luminosity instead of
Normal works with
the Healing tool just
as well as the Clone
tool,but you’ll only
need it for extreme
situations when the
built-in blending
algorithm doesn’t
quite cut it.
Sample and
Pattern
The Healing tool
works in two modes:
Sample and Pattern.
In Sample mode it
works like the Clone
tool,while in Pattern
mode it blends the
pixels with one of
Photoshop’s stored
patterns.The uses for
this mode are less
obvious,but useful for
certain effects.
The Healing brush has different
blending modes which you can choose
from the Options bar drop-down menu, 90%
of the time you won’t need to use them.
4
Using the Healing brush instead results
in a totally invisible repair.There’s no
need to change blending modes or opacity,
just set the sample point using the [Alt] key
then click and drag over the damage.
3
Using the Clone tool works, but leaves a
very slight, but noticeable mark behind
due to the sampled pixels being a sightly
different shade.We could use more advanced
techniques, but why bother when the Healing
brush is at hand?
2
The Healing Brush can be found in the
fourth row on the toolbar, and looks like
a plaster. It uses the same sampling principal
as the Clone tool but works by blending the
original and cloned pixels together to create a
near-perfect fix. Here’s an image that needs a
bit of a repair.
1
The Healing Patch tool
If you don’t like using brushes and selections
are more your thing,try the Patch tool
52 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 4
No smear
TheHealingandPatch
toolscansmearifthey
areneartoverydark
pixels.Useaselectionto
protecttheareayou
wanttofixif
smearingoccurs.
When you release the mouse button,
the pixels will become merged with
those below. Photoshop performs its trick
intelligently, so the dark area vanishes but
the skin tone looks normal.We can repeat
this on the other eye to complete the anti-
ageing process.
4
Because Destination mode is enabled
we can drag these selected pixels onto
the destination pixels. As you drag a copy of
the pixels, the selected area moves with the
mouse as a visual cue – you are actually
cloning the pixels.
3
With the Patch tool selected we lasso an
area of clean skin texture, just below the
eye we want to fix.That area is highlighted
with the familiar marching ants.
2
The Patch tool can be found in the same
tool group as the Healing Brush, but it
has fewer options.The most logical mode to
use is Destination, so this is how we have it set
for now.We want to make the man in this
photo look a bit younger by removing the
bags under his eyes.
1
53ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Cloning and Healing tools
Large patches
The Patch tool can be
useful when
attempting to repair
very large areas in
one go.It’s much
quicker than using
the Healing Brush too.
Select then Patch
If you need to,you can
make the selection
before you choose the
Patch tool.This means
that you can use any of
Photoshop’s advanced
selections tools,such as
Quick Mask,Colour
Range or the Magic
Wand to preselect the
area you require
more precisely.
When you are happy with the selected
area you release the mouse.The
selection snaps back to its original location
taking the source pixels with it.When
Photoshop blends the two, the line vanishes.
Here’s the result on both eyes.
4
Now all you need to do is to drag the
selection over the pixels you want to
use to fix the problem area.This time only the
selection outline moves, not the pixels that are
selected, as is the case in Destination mode.
3
When in Source mode you need to
select the pixel that you want to change
first, as opposed to selecting the pixel you
want to use to fix the problem area. Here we
drag around the line under the left eye using
the Patch tool to select it.
2
The Healing Patch tool works the
opposite way round when in Source
mode. Depending on your way of thinking,
Source mode may seem less intuitive.We will
perform the same trick of removing lines
under the eyes in this image but use Source
mode instead.
1
Chapter 5
THE GRADIENT,
FILL AND
ERASER TOOLS
Gradients and Fills are such
simple tools in Photoshop that
their simplicity can often hide their
power, especially in the hands of an
experienced Photoshop user.
A Fill is simply a way to pour a
single flat colour, pattern or history
state into a selected area, or the
whole canvas. Like most of the tools
in Photoshop, there is more than one
way in which to accomplish a Fill;
we’ll explore some of these different
techniques later on in this chapter.
Gradual benefits
The Gradient options are even
more powerful than Fills. With the
Gradient tool you can create a fill
In this chapter…
Learn to use and
control Gradients
Create Custom
Gradients, using the
gradient editing
features in Photoshop 7
Use the Paint Bucket
tool to fill areas with
a colour, pattern
or history
Use Gradients and
Fills for special effects
and image
manipulation
Remove a subject from
its background using
the Background and
Magic Eraser tools
Once you get more competent with
Photoshop you’ll appreciate the importance of
these utility tools.The Gradient tool in particular
is essential for all manner of tricks and effects
that gradually changes colour.
Gradients come in all kinds of
different shapes: Linear, Radial,
Angular, Reflected and Diamond,
and this makes them very useful for
a variety of different situations.
The Gradient Editing feature in
Photoshop enables you to create
gradients with two or more colours.
You can have a simple white-to-
black gradient, or a whole rainbow
of colours. For special effects work
the simple black and white gradient
is absolutely indispensable, putting
a whole range of additional options
at your disposal. For example, if you
want an effect to smoothly fade
from full strength to invisible then
it’s easy to use a white-to-black
gradient to control this, usually as
a layer mask.
Photo perfection
For photographers, coloured
gradients can play the role of custom
filters, making it easy to create
sultry sunsets or brooding, stormy
skies at the drag of a mouse. If you
combine gradients with alpha
channels you have the power user’s
playground. The ability to construct
complex masks and selections using
alpha channels and the Gradient tool
is unparalleled.
While the Fill and Gradient tools
are concerned with adding pixels to
an image, the next family of tools
that we’ll look at does quite the
opposite. The Eraser tool lets you
remove pixels by simply using a
brush, like an anti-paint brush,
which enables you to paint away
pixels on a layer leaving nothing but
transparency behind. The power
version of the Eraser is the
Background Eraser. This tool is
designed to make the extraction of
subjects from their background a
relatively simple task. Don’t be
fooled though – it’s still a tricky
proposition, but we’ll show you how
to avoid the pitfalls of this technique
so that you can achieve the best
possible results every time.
55ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Gradients, Fills and Erasing
Page 64 Blend two or more image
layers together with Gradients
Page 62 Use gradients and blending
layers to simulate photographic filters
Page 66 Learn how to avoid the pitfalls
of the Background Eraser tool
Page 56 Learn how to fill colours in an
image using the Paint Bucket tool
Page 57 Fill with 50% grey for special
effects and image enhancement
Page 59 We look at the Gradient tool
and its various options
The Paint Bucket
The Paint Bucket tool lets you pour pixels
into any selection,and it has a few tricks too
56 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 5
Missing Paint
Bucket?
Photoshop’s toolbar
has undergone many
revisions over the
years,so the Paint
Bucket may be
located elsewhere in
older versions.
Select and fill
Save time by using
the Paint Bucket in
one fell swoop,
instead of using the
Magic Wand to make
a selection and
then filling it.
Instead, what happens is the same as
with the Magic Wand tool.The Paint
Bucket searches for similar coloured pixels
to fill, within the tolerance that you set, rather
than covering the whole layer. Increase the
Tolerance setting in the Option bar to fill a
wider range of colours.
4
However, the Paint Bucket has more in
common with the Magic Wand than you
think. If your selected area already has image
pixels in it, clicking on the image will not
necessarily fill the whole selection or layer.
3
It can operate in Foreground Colour
mode or in Pattern mode, which you
choose from the drop-down menu in the
Options bar.You can then select a pattern
from the drop-down presets menu, also in the
Option bar, and click in the image to fill it.
2
The Paint Bucket can be found in the
sixth row of the toolbar in Photoshop 7,
in the same tool group as the Gradient tool.
If you make a selection you can use this tool
to fill it with the current foreground colour.
1
57ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Gradients, Fills and Erasing
In the mode
In Overlay mode 50%
grey pixels are totally
transparent.Pixels
brighter than 50% are
applied in Screen mode,
while those darker than
50% are applied in
Multiply mode.
Video tutorials
On the CD this month
is a set of video
training tutorials
created by our very
own Photoshop guru,
George Cairns.If you
want to learn more
about using every
tool in the Photoshop
toolbar,you’ll find
your CD invaluable.
The layer is filled with the grey, by
making sure the Use All Layers option is
off and clicking in it. Now we can set the Layer
mode to Overlay and apply the noise, blur it
slightly, then change the opacity of the layer
any time we want to control the effect.
8
We need to soften the noise, by blurring
it but not the image. So we need to
apply the noise in a layer above the image.
However, the Noise filter does not work on a
transparent layer. Enter the Paint Bucket.
The Foreground Colour is set to 50% grey
using Colour Picker and setting Lab Lightness
to 50, A and B to 0.
7
Another use for fills is for special effects.
An example is for adding noise to a 3D
or digital image to make it look more like
photographic film.We could simply apply
noise to the image directly but this limits our
options later if we want to change the noise,
say, to make it less obvious. Applying the
noise as-is also tends to looks fake.
6
Using a lower tolerance you can build
up the fill by clicking a couple of times
on different areas of the image.In this example
we did so in a new layer.You have to make
sure the Use All Layers option is checked
when using a transparent layer for the fill.
Applying the layer in Color mode allows us to
change the colour of the girl’s kagool.
5
The Paint Bucket enables you
to fill areas using a tolerance
setting like the Magic Wand tool.
It also has settings to fill contiguous
pixels – or not, as the case may be.
Enabling the Contiguous mode in
the Paint Bucket tool’s Options bar
(this is the default setting) only fills
pixels that are both within the
tolerance and physically connected
in the image. Disabling this mode
causes the Paint Bucket to search
over the whole image for pixels
similar to the one that you click on.
The Anti-aliasing option simply
means that the edges of the fill are
smoothly anti-aliased to remove any
unsightly jagged edges.
More Fill options
The Paint Bucket is just one of a number of ways
in which you can fill an image or selection
58 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 5
The difference between the smooth anti-aliased
fill (green) and the jagged non-anti-aliased fill
(pink) is quite obvious in this close-up
Fetching patterns
Custom fill patterns can
be found on the web.
Here’s the address of a
site where you can
download free
Photoshop patterns:
http://graphicssoft.about.
com/library/free/
blfree_pspatterns1.htm
Keep it cool
Fills and patterns are
useful for creating
backdrops for web
pages.Be careful
though,because
patterned backgrounds
can be very distracting,
so keep them as subtle
as possible.
YOU CAN fill using the current foreground colour by typing [Alt]+
[Delete].Typing [Ctrl]+[Delete] (or [Command]+[Delete] for Mac users)
will fill using the current background colour. Pressing the [D] key reverts
the colour to the default black and white.
ANOTHER WAY to fill is using the Edit > Fill menu command.This has a
few extras, such as a pop-up menu for choosing to fill with either White,
Black, Foreground or Background colour, or the handy‘50% Grey’.
THE FILL Command also enables you to fill using the earmarked
history state in the History palette.You can furthermore set it to Pattern
mode and choose a pattern from within the Fill dialog.
CHOOSE YOUR pattern from one of Photoshop’s presets or use your
own custom-made pattern if you prefer. Any rectangular selection can
be stored as a pattern using the Edit > Define Pattern command.
FILLING TIPS
The Gradient tool
The Gradient tool is indispensable when
working on multi-layered documents
59ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Gradients, Fills and Erasing
Degrees of
constraint
Hold down the [Shift]
key while dragging to
constrain the angle of
your gradient to
45-degree increments.
Gradient presets
While using the
Gradient tool right-click
to pop up the gradient
presets palette.Mac
users will need to press
[Ctrl] instead.
The distance you drag will define the
width of the gradient. It can by very
tight if you only drag a little way (top) or very
loose if you drag a long way (bottom). Note
that before the first point the pixels are made
up of 100% first colour, and after the last point
they are 100% last colour.
4
The Gradient tool can be found in the
sixth row of the toolbar, and has an icon
with a small black-to-white gradient. Use the
tool by simply dragging out a line indicating
the direction of the gradient.The first point
you click defines where the first colour will
end, and the point where you release the
mouse after dragging is where the second (or
last colour if it has more the two) will begin.
3
...or colourful, like this red-to-green
gradient.You can also blend a
monotone colour, like black or white into a
colour such as red, and the brightness and
saturation of the colour will smoothly blend
across the distance that you specify.
2
A gradient is very simply two colours
spread over a distance and smoothly
blended from the one to the other.They can
be monotone, like this simple black-to-white
linear gradient…
1
The GradientTool continued
60 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 5
See-through
options
TheTransparency
check-box in the
Options bar allows you
to turn off the
transparent part of a
gradient if it is enabled.
Make it noisy
The Dither check-box
enables a dithering or
jitter to the gradient,
adding a touch of
noise,which can help
reduce banding
effects when printing.
Custom gradients can contain any
number colours that you specify and
are edited in the Gradient Editing panel.They
can also incorporate transparency. Here is a
custom preset that combines a multicolour
gradient with alternating transparency.
8
Foreground to Transparent takes the
current foreground colour and blends
it to nothing, leaving only transparent pixels.
This can be great for blending gradients over
images, for example.
7
Foreground to Background mode
simply uses the current foreground
colour as the first point, and the current
background colour as the last point and
creates a blend between them.
6
There are actually three types of
gradient. Foreground to Background,
Foreground to Transparent, and Custom. Each
type is selected from the preset pop-up in the
Gradient tool’s Option bar.There are usually a
number of preset custom gradients available.
5
When the Gradient tool is
selected, clicking on the
preset sample at the top-left of the
Option bar opens up the Gradient
Editor panel. Here you can choose
from a range of ready-made
gradients, or create your own.
To create a custom gradient just
select a preset and begin editing the
colours of the ‘nodes’ in the editing
strip at the bottom of the panel.
The top of the strip contains the
transparency nodes, while the
bottom contains the colour nodes.
Click on a node (or ‘Color Stop’ as
Adobe calls them) to edit its colour.
The Stops section lets you edit
the properties of the selected stop.
The Gradient Editor panel
Editing gradients is done in the Gradient Editor
panel in Photoshop 6 onwards
61ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Gradients, Fills and Erasing
Clicking on a colour node,(or‘Stop’as Adobe
calls them) in the gradient strip at the bottom
of the panel selects it for editing.
Changing stops
Creating new stops is
done by clicking in free
space above or below
the gradient strip.To
remove a stop,
drag it away and let go.
Stops can be moved by
dragging them
left or right.
The Preset list is displayed
at the top.You can change
the size of the previews from
the panel’s pop-up menu.
You can change the type
of gradient from the pop-up.
The options are Color
(normal) and Noise.
Create a new preset from
the current gradient strip by
clicking on this button here.
The Color Stops (or nodes)
are displayed underneath the
gradient strip.Click on one to
select it for editing.Clicking
where there is no stop
present adds a new one.
the Transparency Stops
are displayed on top of the
gradient strip.They can be
either white,black or shades
of grey only.
When you select a Colour
or Transparency Stop its
mid-point handle is also
displayed.Drag this to
change the rate of blending
between nodes.
THE GRADIENT EDITOR EXPLAINED
Using Gradients creatively
Now let’s look at how useful Gradients can
be when working creatively in Photoshop
62 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 5
Trial and error
Experiment with all the
Layer Blending modes
and get a feel for how
they affect the image.
Some will have similar
pleasing effects,while
others will just look
plain awful.
Comprehend
the blend
There are technical
explanations for each
of the Blending modes
in your Photoshop
Manual or online
guide.It's worth going
through these to
understand exactly
what's going on.
In a new layer, we add a Foreground
to Transparent gradient once more, but
choose a much darker blue.The layer mode is
this time set to Multiply, creating a dark cast
over the image. Finally, a Levels Adjustment
Layer is added to the image, which controls
all brightness and gamma.
4
Another use for gradients is to add
mood to a Photo. Here’s an image of a
model looking quite moody, but the picture
itself could be even moodier. It’s simple with
a gradient to add that mood.
3
In a new layer we add a vertical dark
blue transparent gradient over the
image. Setting the layer’s blending mode to
Overlay blends the colour and brightness of
the gradient in a special way, creating a
deeper, darker sky.
2
Gradients are great for those working
with digital or scanned photographic
images in Photoshop.We can use gradients
in place of traditional photographic filters to
create some cool effects. Here’s the original
unfiltered image.
1
Gradient Styles
The Linear gradient is only one of five styles.
We’ll look at the others and see what they offer
63ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Gradients, Fills and Erasing
Turn it around
The invert button in the
Options bar reverses
the direction of the
colours in the gradient.
Quick sample
Use the [Alt] key to
activate the Eye
Dropper.You can then
choose colours for the
gradient from
your image.
Finally, the Diamond style is similar to
the Radial style, except that the edges
form a square rather than a smooth circle.
This can be useful for certain kinds of vignette
effects, for example.
4
Next up is the Reflected style.This type
of gradient can be useful, especially for
creating masks and selections. In this case a
Linear gradient is created, but in opposite
directions from where you drag.
3
The next style option is the Circular
style.This is not a common one to use,
but can be useful. In this case the gradient is
wrapped around in a circular motion.The line
you drag doesn’t mark the size of the
gradient, but only the direction of the colours.
2
At the top of the Gradient tool’s Options
bar next to the preset pop-up are the
Gradient Styles. Linear is the default, but next
to it is the Radial style. Selecting this creates
a radial gradient using the selected preset.
The first point you click is the center of the
gradient, dragging outwards to the edges.
1
Gradient Masks
Use a simple black and white gradient in a
layer mask for creating composite images
64 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 5
Application
options
You can apply masks
to adjustment layers as
well as normal image
layers.So we could
have applied the levels
as an adjustment layer
using the same
gradient trick to mask
out its effect on the
lower part of
the image.
Vignettes
Create vignettes using
a Radial gradient as a
layer mask applied to
a Solid Fill Layer.You
can then adjust the
colour of the fill to suit
different uses.
Finally Image > Adjustment > Levels
is applied to the Sky layer (not to the
mask). In the dialog box that appears, drag up
the black input slider to darken the sky and
making it match better with the image below.
4
A layer mask is added to the Sky layer,
by clicking the New Layer Mask button
at the bottom of the Layers palette. Making
sure the layer mask is selected and not the
layer, we can use a black-to-white linear
gradient to mask out the bottom of the sky
layer, blending the two images together.
3
One image is copied into the other by
dragging its layer from the Layers
palette over the other’s image window and
releasing the mouse.The sky image is scaled
roughly to fit using the Free Transform tool.
2
One very popular use of the Gradient
tool is to make one image blend
smoothly into another. Here are two images
that we want to composite, by blending one
gradually into the other.
1
Because Photoshop handles
transparency as a mask, a
simple black and white gradient can
be used to smoothly manipulate
layer transparency. Photoshop also
enables us to convert a mask into a
selection and vice-versa.
For example, you can create a
gradient selection by switching to
the Channels palette, creating a new
alpha channel and drawing a
gradient in it. Then by [Command]+
clicking on the alpha channel, it can
be loaded as a selection: black areas
are unselected, white areas are fully
selected, shades of grey are partially
selected, depending on brightness.
So loading a gradient in this way
creates a variable selection, through
which we can apply filters, paint or
whatever. Another way to do the
same thing would be to enter Quick
Mask mode, apply the Gradient tool
on the Quick Mask, then press [Q]
to convert it to an active selection.
Once a gradient selection is made,
you can convert it to a layer mask
simply by adding a layer mask to a
layer with the selection active.
Masks and selections in detail
We’ll look at some different ways to create
gradient masks and selections
65ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Gradients, Fills and Erasing
Goodbye halo
If applying a filter such as
Gaussian Blur through a
gradient selection it’s best to
apply the filter multiple
times with a small value.
Otherwise you will get a
‘halo’around the partially
selected pixels rather than a
smooth blur.
As we’ve seen, we can use gradients as layer masks when
compositing images.We can also apply gradients to layers
using blending modes to get different effects. Another use,
which is sort of between the two, is to control the effects of
an adjustment layer with a gradient mask. It helps to make
the gradient selection first, as described above, then add
your adjustment layer. Unlike pixel-based layers, adjustment
layers are created automatically with a layer mask. Any
current selection will become the layer mask for this new
layer. Make the adjustment, such as increasing the contrast,
and see the results as applied through the mask directly.
GRADIENT LAYER MASKS WITH ADJUSTMENT LAYERS
Here’s another handy way of using Gradients
A Hue/Saturation Adjustment Layer is
applied to this image using a gradient
layer mask
Magic and Background Erasers
One is like the Eraser and Magic Wand in one,
while the other is ideal for cutting out objects
66 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 5
Know the limits
In all honesty the Magic
Eraser is not one of the
best tools in
Photoshop's arsenal.It
can be useful for
quickly erasing
something but only
works well on a limited
range of images.
Look elsewhere
There are a number of
third party tools
available that do a
better job at removing
backgrounds than
Photoshop’s
Eraser tools.
Our Dog image proves to be far more
difficult a proposition, however.
Although the Magic Eraser works fairly well
on the sky, on the grass it doesn’t do so well.
This is because the grass is so varied in colour
and brightness that the Eraser has a hard job
of finding the right colours to remove.
4
After a couple of clicks the whole
backdrop is erased, leaving a nice
clean-edged subject surrounded by
transparent pixels.This is useful if you then
want to save the image as a GIF for example,
with transparency intact.
3
Alternatively you can cut out the middle
man (or woman as is quite literally the
case here) by using the Magic Eraser tool.With
this tool you can click on the background to
erase it directly in one click. All colours that
fall within the tolerance setting are deleted.
2
In an image such as this it is fairly easy
to remove the subject from the
background because there is a definite
difference in colour between them. Photoshop
has many ways of doing this, you could make
a selection using the Magic Wand tool then
delete it, for instance.
1
67ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Gradients, Fills and Erasing
Background
details
Like the Magic Wand,
the Background Eraser
has aTolerance setting
but also Limits and
Sampling Method
options.Continuous
lets you sample as you
paint,while the Once
option samples only
on the first click.
Background Swatch
lets you save a colour
to use as the sample.
Glitch invasion
The Background Eraser
is not a tool that a
professional Photoshop
user would feel at home
with. It tends to leave far
too many glitches in the
edge of the cut-out
objects,which take extra
time to fix up later.
It’s still slightly messy, but the bulk of
the rest of the background can be
deleted using a rough selection. It’s the bits
near to the subject that cause the problem,
and the Background Eraser does a pretty
good job of keeping the parts you want and
deleting those you don’t.
8
The tool has a boundary like a normal
brush and a central cross.When you
paint you must keep quite close to the edge
of the object you wish to keep, without
actually touching it.The tool samples and
erases as it goes, but does so only within the
brush area. If you slip and accidentally cross
over onto your object then it will be deleted,
so care is required.
7
Using the Background Eraser tool
(you’ll find it in the Eraser tool group in
the sixth row of the toolbar) results in a more
controllable method of chopping the pooch
out of his environment.The tool is brush-
based, so you simply paint away to remove
the background.
6
Turning off the Contiguous option
might improve matters.This makes
the tool search the whole image for similar
colours, rather than just examining pixels
that are connected to the starting point.
Unfortunately we end up losing most of our
dog as well when we try this method.
5
Chapter 6
GETTING TO
KNOW THE
EFFECTS TOOLS
When it comes down to it,
Photoshop is mostly about
effects. Be it a simple vignette, a
crop or even an image enhancement,
what you are really doing is creating
some kind of effect to spice up an
image. Photoshop’s filters offer you
a broad palette of effects, which can
be applied to images, both very
subtly or dramatically. Combine
filters with selections and masks,
layers and blending modes and you
have a cornucopia of digital tricks
that can improve an image no end.
Photoshop also has a small group
of effects-based tools which work in
a similar way to the filters and
adjustment features in many
In this chapter…
Blur or sharpen parts
of an image using the
‘focus’ tools
Create finger-painting
effects or blend
colours using the
Smudge tool
Create better
composite images
using ‘exposure’ tools
Make your subject
stand out with Dodge
and Burn effects
Photoshop’s effects tools include Blur,Sharpen,
Smudge,Dodge and Burn.We’ll look at how
best to use them to spice up your artwork,
composites and photographic images
respects, but do so in a more
artistically controllable way.
Essentially these are brush-based
filters, allowing you to ‘paint’ the
effects just where you need them.
Focus and exposure
Effect tools are in two different
groups. The ‘focus’ tools are in the
seventh row of the toolbar in
Photoshop 7 and consist of the
Blur, Sharpen and Smudge tools.
‘Exposure’ tools are directly to the
right of this and contain the Dodge,
Burn and Sponge tools. Click and
hold on the groups to reveal all the
tools in that group. You’ll also note
that next to each tool is a letter. This
is the tool’s shortcut key, and there
is one for almost every tool in
Photoshop’s toolbar. Pressing that
key will activate the respective tool
no matter what else is selected.
The ‘focus’ tools – Blur and
Sharpen – allow you to apply these
filter-like effects directly to pixels in
the image using any of Photoshop’s
brushes – including the complex,
customisable brush shapes. But most
of the time you’ll find it best to use
these tools with a normal, soft,
round brush. The Smudge tool works
in a slightly different way, however,
and we’ll look at how to use that
particular tool more closely later in
the chapter.
The ‘exposure’ tools – Dodge,
Burn and Sponge also let you paint
their effects onto an image directly.
These tools produce effects similar
to the Adjustment tools like Levels,
Curves and Hue/Saturation.
Shadow play
Using the exposure tools is an
excellent way of producing photo-
realistic composites. The tools
enable you to paint additional
shadows or highlights in precisely
the right areas, to give composited
elements the correct shading. The
shadows will then look like they
really belong there – which is just
the effect you’re after.
69ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Effects Tools
Page 75 Dodge and Burn adjust pixel
contrast and brightness by painting them
Page 73The Smudge tool lets you
apply paint with a finger-painting effect
Page 79 Focus in on an object within an
image by Burning the background
Page 70The Blur tool works by blurring
the pixels in an image,to varying intensity
Page 71 Decreasing the brush spacing
allows for a more intense Blur effect
Page 72 Maximise the usefulness of the
Sharpen tool,with its blending modes
The‘focus’tools
The‘focus’tools are simple to use when you
understand how they work.Let’s explore them
70 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 6
Pop-up palette
You can also pop up the
brushes preset palette
by right-clicking in the
image window.Mac
users will need to hold
down [Ctrl] and click.
In a hurry?
The pop-up Brushes
palette can be
momentary ([Alt]+
click+hold) or persistent
([Alt]+click+release)
enabling you to choose
a brush quickly or
browse at leisure.
The tool applies the effect continually
so even if you stop moving the mouse
the effect continues to be applied.The
strength slider therefore does not control the
maximum amount of blur, but rather the rate
at which blurring will intensify. On the right
the blur tool is applied for 5 seconds at 10%,
and on the left 5 seconds at 100%.
4
The Strength slider in the Options bar
controls the intensity of the blur – how
quickly the blur intensifies as you paint. Use
the numeric keypad to quickly type in the
strength you require. For example, pressing
the 1 key on the keypad equals 10% strength,
5 equals 50%, and 0 equals 100%. Here’s the
same stroke applied once at 10%, 50% and
100% strength to the pattern’s bottom edge.
3
The tool uses the normal brushes
interface and preset menu, accessible
from the Options bar as usual. Most of the
time you’ll be using the Blur tool with just a
normal, round, soft brush rather than
anything fancy.
2
The Blur tool can be selected from the
seventh row of the toolbar or with the a
shortcut key [R]. Simply put, you can use this
tool to soften edges and detail in an image by
painting over it.
1
The Blur tool
71ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Effects Tools
Blurred or
focused?
The trick for a
successful blurring
effect,as on the girl’s
portrait,is to apply
the blur tool only to
parts of an image and
leave key areas,such
as the eye,in focus.
Blurred light
Other blending modes
on offer – Hue,Colour
and Saturation,are less
suitable modes to use
with the Blur tool in
most cases.
But Lightness can be
quite handy,as it blurs
the details but not
the colours.
Setting it to Lighten mode does the
opposite and creates a light glow or
halo.This is a great way to soften bright
highlights within an image in order to create
soft focus and bloom effects on otherwise
dead sharp images.
8
The tools can be set to different
blending modes, and this can be very
useful for certain effects. In Darken mode,
blurring parts of an image creates an eerie
dark glow around objects.The result is
actually similar to some types of old
cinematic film.
7
There is however a simple way to
overcome this and to boost the Blur
tool’s power.What you need to do is edit the
Spacing setting for the brush you are using.
The default 25% spacing is often not enough.
Reducing the Spacing means the‘flow’of the
effect in increased,so blurring is given a boost.
6
Even with the tool set to 100% strength
it can seem like it doesn’t blur to a very
high degree. In fact it feels like it reaches a
plateau where it no longer has any effect.This
is because as the pixels get more blurry you
need an ever stronger blur to see any effect.
But since the strength is at maximum, the tool
just appears to come to a halt.
5
The Sharpen tool
The antithesis of the Blur tool is the Sharpen
tool.No prizes for guessing what this tool does
72 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 6
A sharp escape
When working on large
images with large
brushes,the Blur and
Sharpen tools can take
some time to calculate.
If you want to stop the
calculation of a blur or
sharpen while in
progress,press
the [Esc] key.
Slick selection
Selecting the general
area before using the
Blur or Sharpen tool
can speed things up.
To reduce the multicolour noise effect,
switching to the tool’s blending mode,
to Luminosity, is a great help. Now only the
brightness details in the image are sharpened
but not the colour, which is often where the
noise resides.
4
The Sharpen tool works best when the
Strength slider is kept low – on
photographic images, or those that have been
compressed using lossy compression such as
JPEG, the sharpening can increase‘noise’–
the pixels become too sharp and stand out
too much from the image.Therefore, too high
a strength setting for the sharpening effect
can ruin the image.
3
You could of course construct a mask to
protect the blurred areas, but using the
Sharpen tool with a large soft brush it’s simply
a matter of painting in where you want the
sharpening to occur. Noise in blurred parts is
therefore kept at bay.
2
The Sharpen tool is used to selectively
sharpen pixels in an image.This can be
very useful, as in this image, where there is
variable focus. Applying the Sharpen filter can
sharpen unwanted noise in the blurred parts
of the image.
1
In the focus tool group you’ll also
find the Smudge tool. Its
inclusion in this group is a slightly
moot point because it has more in
common with the Paintbush, at least
in the way it’s used. A look at the
Smudge tool’s options in the Options
bar at the top of the Photoshop
interface reveals its various
properties. There is the usual
Brushes Presets drop-down menu,
where you can select any of
Photoshop’s brushes, the Blending
mode menu, Strength slider,
Multiple Layers option, and the
Finger Painting mode, which smears
the foreground colour onto the
image, using the other pixels.
The Smudge tool
The Smudge tool is more like a spacial
paintbrush than a focus effect – here’s why
73ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Effects Tools
In Finger Painting mode,the foreground colour
is mixed with the original image pixels,while in
Normal mode only the image pixels are used
Activate with R
The [R] key activates
the uppermost tools
in the focus tool
group.[Shift]+[R]
cycles through the
Blur,Sharpen and
Smudge tools.
Smudge it
Use the Smudge tool in
the same way as you
would your finger when
working with pencil or
charcoal.Smudging a
textured brush will
smooth it out.
IN NORMAL mode the Smudge tool smears the pixels along the
direction of the brush stroke.The Strength slider is important here.
Setting it low causes the smudge effect to fade out as you brush.You can
set the strength from 1% to 99%, but setting it to 100% enables a special
mode – the first pixels you click on are sampled and smeared indefinitely,
for as long as you paint.
ALL LAYERS lets you smudge colours from all layers. However, the
results is only applied to the currently active layer, not to all the layers.
It only means that the Smudge tool samples from all the layers.
THE SMUDGE tool can take a lot of computation,especially for large
brushes.If your computer is grinding to a halt,try reducing the brush size.
MAKING USE of the blending modes can be a lot of fun. For example,
Lighten mode can create glowing swirls and streaks on an image.
THE SMUDGE TOOL’S OPTIONS IN DETAIL
Working with the Smudge tool
Here’s how to use the Smudge tool to create
some amazingly eye-catching effects
74 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 6
Smudge control
The Smudge tool’s
dynamic settings can
be set up to respond
to a graphics pen’s
pressure and/or tilt
for extra response
and feedback.
New layer
The Smudge tool has a
Use All Layers option.
You can use this to
smudge pixels on all
visible layers.It’s best to
do this on a new clean
layer so you can undo
the effect easily
if necessary.
Setting the Fade control on the Other
Dynamics section to alter the Strength
property creates a brush that gently fades the
strength, so that it’s 100% to begin with and
1% at the end.The Fade value represents the
distance over which the effect is faded.
4
What can be useful is editing the
current brush to enable the Fade
setting. Clicking on the button at the far right
of the Options bar opens the Brushes palette.
In the Shape Dynamics section the Size
control can be set to Fade and a value for the
distance in pixels entered.This creates a
tapering smudge, useful for creating wisps
and curls.
3
The Strength slider controls the length
of the smudge effect. A low Strength
setting smudges only slightly, but it will
continue for as long as you keep the mouse
button pressed.
2
Using the Smudge tool is pretty
intuitive. Set to a very high strength,
90% here, the tool continually samples colours
from the image you are smudging, dragging
the colours with it as it goes.
1
Dodge and Burn
The Dodge and Burn tools enable you to add
subtle or intense shading to an image
75ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Effects Tools
Burn your own
material
Use the Burn tool to
add shadows to objects
you create from scratch
in Photoshop – such as
when creating photo-
realistic images
and graphics.
Dodge the issue
Use the Dodge tool to
add Highlights to
objects that you have
created from scratch
in Photoshop.
With the Dodge tool set to Midtones
mode only the middle range of tones is
affected.The brightest and darkest pixels are
unaltered.You can see that a lot of
otherwise invisible detail has been
revealed.
4
In Highlight mode the Dodge tool
lightened only the brightest pixels in
the image.With an image that has strong
contrast such as this it’s easy to overexpose
the highlights and blow them out.
3
Both the Dodge and Burn tools operate
in three modes, which can be selected
from the Options bar.These are the Highlights,
Midtones and Shadows modes. By default the
Dodge tool operates in Highlights mode, and
the Burn tool in Shadows mode.We’ll
demonstrate the differences, but first here is
the original image before the exposure tools
are used.
2
The Dodge and Burn tools are two sides
of the same coin and refer to traditional
photographic techniques.The Dodge tool is
used to lighten pixels in an image, while the
Burn tool darkens them. Here are two strokes
to illustrate each tool.The image has been
Dodged on the left, Burned on the right.
1
Dodge and Burn continued
76 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 6
To the extreme
Both the Dodge and
Burn tools don’t seem
to work well when
affecting the opposite
ends of the tonal
spectrum.There are
situations where this
can be useful,but
they tend to be used
very subtly.
Background
elements
Focusing in on a subject
by dampening the
highlights of
background elements
using the Burn tool is a
good example of the
tip above.
There’s something familiar about this
one. In Highlights mode, the Burn tool
lowers the brightness of the brightest pixels,
resulting in what looks like a stroke of
transparent black paint across the image.
So the Burn tool works best in Shadows and
Midtones mode and the Dodge tool works
best in Highlights and Midtones mode.
8
In Midtones mode the middle range of
tones is darkened leaving the darkest
and lightest pixels as they were.This is like
applying the gamma slider in the Levels
dialog to darken an image’s midtones, but
only where you paint.
7
If we start with a very light image and
use the Burn tool we can better see its
effects. Here in Shadows mode, the tool picks
out the dark areas in the image and makes
them even darker.
6
In Shadows mode, it’s the darkest pixels
that get lightened. this is quite a
different result. it looks like we’ve painted
across the image with a transparent white
brush – not good at all.
5
The Sponge tool
The Sponge tool is the cousin of Dodge and
Burn.It varies the saturation level in an image
77ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Effects Tools
Spray the sponge
The Sponge tool has
an Airbrush mode.
You can click and
hold to continually
apply the effect.
Colour Range
Make a selection using
Color Range to focus
the Sponge tool on
certain colours in
the image.
A better way to go about this is to apply
Hue/Saturation to the whole image
before you desaturate it with the Sponge.This
lets you see how much saturation to apply,
rather than flatten out the colours.You can
even control the saturation of the colours
independently using the pop-up menu.
4
Switching to Saturate mode, you’d think
it would be easy to increase the
saturation of the girl to enhance the effect.
However as you can see even when we lower
the strength setting, the result is uneven, and
in some places the colours have‘flattened’out
due to over-saturation.
3
You can of course perform this kind of
action using the Hue/Saturation
command or an Adjustment Layer. But the
Sponge tool does the same thing in a more
hands-on way. Here, we’ve painted on the
image with the Sponge tool in Desaturate
mode to make the girl stand out from the
background more.
2
Using the Sponge tool couldn’t be
easier. It’s a very simple tool that makes
pixels either less or more Saturated. By
saturation, we mean how colourful a pixel is.
More saturated colours are vivid, while less
saturated ones are washed out.
1
Using the Dodge and Burn
tools is quite simple but you
need to take into account certain
things, in order to get the best
results. The Dodge and Burn tools
are often used to add shading to
elements in a composite image so
that they match the background or
other elements in the image.
Look for shadows in the image to
find out where the main light is
coming from. Highlights – parts of
the object in direct illumination –
can be added by painting with the
Dodge tool in Highlight and/or
Midtones mode, while shadows can
be painted on with the Burn tool in
Shadows and/or Midtones mode.
Using Dodge and Burn
Here’s how the Dodge and Burn tools work
in real,or surreal,situations
78 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 6
The direction of the light cast on other elements
or in the background image,determines where
to apply effects with the Dodge and Burn tools
Toggle tools
Use the [Alt] key to
toggle between the
Dodge and Burn tools
as you work.There’s no
need to stop and switch
tools manually.
The Options bar is where
you’ll find the different
modes and the strength
slider for the exposure tools.
Airbrush mode is available
for the Dodge,Burn and
Sponge tools.This applies the
effect constantly while the
mouse is held down,so
there’s no need to wiggle the
mouse to intensify the effect
in a certain spot.
These areas in the image
have been darkened by
painting on the image using
the Burn tool,and setting it to
Shadows mode.
The Sponge tool has been
used in many of the dodged
and burned areas to
desaturate the image in
those places.
Dodge,Burn and Sponge
tools are located in the
‘exposure’tool group in
Photoshop 7’s toolbar.
These areas in the image
have been lightened by
painting using the Dodge
tool in Highlights mode.
THE EFFECTS OF DODGE,BURN AND SPONGE
FocusinginwithDodgeandBurn
Dodge and Burn is a great way of focusing in
on the subject of an image,or even a new area
79ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Effects Tools
Faded paint
After using the
Dodge,Burn or
Sponge tools,you can
used the Edit > Fade
command to vary the
intensity of the last
stroke you painted.
Fade away
The Fade command
actually works with
most of the brush-
based tools in
Photoshop.You can
often change the
blending mode here
as well as the opacity.
Using Shadows mode is probably not
a good idea in this case because you
would be changing the contrast balance
between the subject and background in a
more unnatural way.
4
We can work on the background layer,
(having made a copy of it) with the layer
mask applied to protect the main leaf.We’ll
use the the Burn tool set to Highlight mode
and a low opacity. Keeping the brush strokes
loose and slightly random, we can dampen
the brightness of the surrounding leaves.
3
We can force the image to have a
subject by picking one of the leaves and
then adjusting the rest using Dodge and Burn.
First we isolate the subject leaf by creating a
mask for it using the Magnetic Lasso and then
Quick Mask mode to touch up the edges.
2
Here’s a good example of an image that
has no focus. It would work well as a
texture or background, but the uniformity of
the subject makes it difficult to pick out any
one leaf as the main subject in the image.
1
Chapter 7
WORKING WITH
THE TYPE TOOL
IN PHOTOSHOP
Type and text has numerous
applications in Photoshop.
You can create logos, web buttons,
cool 3D text, even paragraphs of
prose using the Type tool. In earlier
versions of the program, text was a
very basic affair. You created text as
a selection which could be filled
with a colour in a layer or applied as
a layer mask to create type that
knocked out part of an image, or was
itself filled with an image or texture.
In Photoshop 7, text has become a
fully-fledged feature, and the most
important aspects of this are its Type
Layers. Like Adjustment Layers,
Solid Fill and Gradient Layers, Type
Layers are ‘live’. This means that the
In this chapter…
Using the Type tool
and Type layers
Creating type effects
with Layer Styles
Managing, transforming
and distorting type
Creating text in Photoshop is quite easy to do,
whether it’s for artistic effect or simply to add
essential information.We’ll look at the various
options available with the Type tool
text is created as real type just like in
a word processing program or vector
illustration program. The type can be
edited, so that you can go back and
change the font used, the colour
applied or the properties of the text,
such as scale, leading (line spacing)
and kerning (letter spacing).
Quality assured
Type layers are produced using
vector technology, just like in a
vector-based tools such as Illustrator
or Freehand, and this has two very
important consequences. The first is
that type is ‘resolution independent’.
This means that you can scale,
rotate, stretch and distort type layers
and they will never degrade. It is the
vector paths that are altered, and the
rasterization is performed at the end.
You’ll always have crisp, clean type,
until the Photoshop document is
saved as a flattened image or printed.
Pixel perfect
The other consequence is that you
can, if you wish, decide to keep the
text as vectors if you print to a
postscript printer. This means that
the type is printed at the highest
possible quality and is never
converted to pixels. Even perfectly
rasterized type will print slightly
fuzzy at the edges. This is because
of the necessary anti-aliasing that is
used in order to convert the flowing
lines of the vector paths into the
rows of square, coloured pixels in a
normal image layer. To be honest,
printing type as true vectors is only
important when producing the
highest quality artwork for printing
on professional printers. Because of
this it only works when out-putting
CMYK separations from Photoshop.
Note: Rasterization is the process of
converting vectors and paths into
‘raster’images, made up of pixels.
Once a type layer is rasterized it
loses any of its special editable
properties and becomes just an
ordinary pixel-based layer.
81ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Text
Page 87The Warp Text palette lets
you distort your type any way you like
Page 84 Learn how to distort vector
text in later versions of Photoshop
Page 89 Use Layer Styles with live layers
to create rich and varied text effects
Page 82 Older versions created text as
selections.Photoshop 7 is more flexible
Page 83Type layers in Photoshop 6
and above can be edited at any time
Page 84 Get to grips with the idea of
different kinds of anti-aliasing for text
TheType tool
Photoshop’s Type tool allows you to add
impressive text and type effects to any image
82 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 7
Twice the size
If using an older version
of Photoshop without
vector text and you
need to transform
type,do so in a new
document that is
twice the size of the
destination document.
The higher resolution
will minimise the
degradation of the
text edges.Resize
the image once the
transformation
is completed,
sharpening it
as necessary.
Computer Arts
To discover even more
ways to develop your
Photoshop skills,check
out our sister magazine,
Computer Arts.
www.computerarts.co.uk
Furthermore, if you wanted to edit the
mask, to make it smaller or larger, distort
it and so on, then the quality of the edge
pixels will deteriorate even further. After just a
few transformations the edges become fuzzy.
4
While this is fine, the text is not a vector
object, so the edges of the type are not
always as crisp and clean as they could be.
This is due to the anti-aliasing used to smooth
non-straight edges of pixel-based images.
3
The type selection could be filled with a
flat colour, saved to a channel ready for
some channel effects work, or as here applied
to an image layer, to create image-filled text.
2
Previously, in releases of Photoshop
earlier than version 6, text was created
like this, as a selection.You could type in your
text in a panel, choose the font and other
options but once created, that was it.
1
83ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Text
Vectors and rasters
Though the type layers
are vector-based,just
like any vector program
Photoshop has to
rasterize them in order
to display them.But
this is an ongoing
process.The type itself
is still stored internally
as a vector.
Rescaling
with text
If you were to rescale a
document containing a
liveType Layer,the type
would scale up
correctly along with the
pixel layers,but
would not suffer
any degradation.
Even after many transformations, the
type layer’s edges remain as crisp and
properly anti-aliased, as it was when the type
was first created.You don’t have to worry
about the edge degrading when working with
type layers.
8
Type created like this is‘live’.You can
select the layer and make changes to
the text it contains, change the font, colour
and whatever else you like.Transforming this
layer is possible using the Free Transform tool,
just as if it was a normal pixel layer.
7
The Type Masks are just like those in
older versions of Photoshop, except
they are more easily edited while they are
being created. Afterwards they are not
editable.The normal Type tool creates type
as a special vector layer called a Type Layer.
6
The vector text introduced in
Photoshop 6 is a whole different ball
game.The Text tool, located in the eighth row
of the toolbar, contains four different tools.
Horizontal and Vertical Type, and Horizontal
and Vertical Type Masks.
5
The familiar Options bar in
Photoshop 7 is home to the
Type tool’s Options and Properties.
As with all tools the first entry at the
top-left is the tool preset picker
pop-up, from which you can select
preset tool settings, or reset the tool
to default. Next is the Horizontal/
Vertical Type toggle, followed by the
Font drop-down menu, Font Style
and Font Size drop-downs.
The next menu is the Anti-aliasing
control. This is an interesting feature
because it enables you to change the
edge anti-aliasing of your text on the
fly. The options are None, Sharp,
Crisp, Strong and Smooth and range
from sharpest to smoothest.
Type Options
The Type tool’s Options bar is one of
the most feature-packed in Photoshop
84 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 7
The Type Anti-aliasing feature controls how
smooth the edges of your type is.It’s more
noticeable on small type that on larger type.
Cycling fonts
The Font field can be
scrolled through to view
alternative fonts,just like the
Font Size field.Just place
your cursor in it and using
the Up/Down arrow keys.
Choose the typeface you
want to use for the selected
type from the Font menu.
Choose your paragraph
alignment by clicking on the
buttons in the Option bar or
in the paragraph panel.
A text layer is denoted by a
large letter T in the layer
preview.The layer name is
always the first few
characters of the text.
The Character panel
contains many of the
properties found in the
Options bar plus some
extra ones,such as Kerning,
Leading and Scale.
Text can be warped using
the Warp Text panel.This is
useful for creating many
special text effects.
Selected text is highlighted
in black.The text colour is
inverted when selected,
so this type will be black
when deselected.
AWHISTLE-STOP TOUR OF YOUR TYPE TOOL OPTIONS
Type tool tips
Some practical tips and advice for getting
the most out of Photoshop’s Type tool
85ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Text
Quick resizing
You can increase or
decrease the size of
text by placing your
cursor in the Size field
and using the Up and
Down arrows.
[Shift]+Up/Down
moves the values in
larger chunks.
Specify units
You can specify text size
using any units you like.
Just place your
chosen unit after the
number value.
For example,20cm is
the same as
2362.2 pixels.
To set the kerning for your text, open
the Character palette by clicking the
palette icon in the Type tool’s Options.There’s
a letter spacing pop-up menu, where you can
choose your desired value. Negative numbers
offer tighter spacing.
4
When creating headings and other
large type, there is a simple rule that
you can apply to get better results. Basically,
larger text such as headings – especially
chunky bold fonts – can have much tighter
kerning (letter spacing) than normal text.
Here’s the same word, one with much tighter
letter spacing.
3
You’ll notice that the drop-down list
only goes up to 72-point text.This is fine
for most web page titles and such, but not
nearly big enough for images destined for
print. If you want larger text, then you have to
enter a value in the text field manually. Here
we’ve used 500-point text in a 1000x1000-
pixel image.
2
When you create text in a Type Layer,
one of the main things you’ll want to do
is get the text the right size.There are, as
always, different ways to do this in Photoshop.
The most obvious is the Size menu in the
Options Bar. Open it up and choose a size.
1
Type tool tips continued
86 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 7
Speedy selections
Select text by clicking
on it with theText
tool.Alternatively you
can select a type layer
and the text within it
by double-clicking the
Layer Preview icon.
Type tool options
TheType tool’s
shortcut is,surprise
surprise,the [T] key.
You can cycle through
each tool in the tool
ground by typing
[Shift]+[T].
Attempting to pan an image while text
is selected will result in this. All your text
will be replaced by a space. If this happens just
click the Cancel Current Edits button in the
Option bar to retrieve your previous text as it
appeared before you started editing it.
8
The only safe way to navigate your
document when in editing mode is to
use the View menu or the [Ctrl]+[+/–] shortcut
(that’s [Command]+[+/–] on a Mac). At least
then you are able to zoom in and out of the
image while text is selected.
7
However, when you move your cursor
far enough away from the text it turns
into the Move tool automatically.This at least
gives you the option to move text around
without leaving the text editing mode.
6
Selecting text can be tricky, but once
you get the hang of it you’ll be fine.
Once text has been created you can click on
the tick in the Options bar to return to normal
Photoshop operation.While text is selected
most of the key commands no longer work,
so be careful you don’t accidentally add
unwanted characters.
5
Using theWarpText panel
Photoshop won’t let you warp text along
a path,but there are still plenty of Warp options
87ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Text
Be patient
BecauseType Layers are
vectors the distortion
does not degrade the
quality of the type.
However,large
amounts of text will
take longer to distort
than a single character.
Extra text tools
Photoshop has
Paragraph tools as well
as Character tools.
These can be found in
the Paragraph palette,
which is docked with
the Character palette
by default.
Using nonsense fonts or symbols
together with the Warp panel you can
get some weird shapes and patterns. It can be
fun and – like all the best features – it takes
some playing with.
4
Warps can be subtle or pretty severe,
depending how you set the sliders.
The Horizontal and Vertical sliders control a
kind of perspective distortion of the type
layer, making it appear to tilt towards or away
from you on either axis.
3
There is a Style pop-up menu, from
which you can choose numerous
distortion types.This is a simple Arc Warp,
set to Vertical mode.
2
When you select a‘live’type layer,
you can access the Warp Text panel by
clicking its icon on the Options bar.The panel
opens and allows you to distort the selected
type using some simple controls.
1
Because type layers are vector-
based you cannot apply pixel-
based effects to them. So you can’t
use filters or paint on them directly,
and you can’t apply adjustments to
them to change their colour or
brightness. You can get around these
problems by adding an adjustment
layer above your type layer, but
you’ll also need a mask if you only
want the adjustment applied to the
text and not to the layers below.
You can change the blending
modes of type layers, which results
in some interesting type effects,
especially over image layers. But
to really get stuck into text layers
you’ll need to rasterize them.
Rasterizing type
In order to apply normal Photoshop effects
to type,you’ll need to rasterize it first
88 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 7
Flatten it
All non-pixel layers
can be rasterized in
Photoshop,using the
appropriate
commands in the
Layers menu.
One way to rasterize type
is to Choose the Layer >
Rasterize > Type command
from the main menu.
Another method is to load
the type layer as a selection.
[Ctrl/Command]+click on the
layer icon and create a new
layer.Fill this layer with colour
using the type selection.
You can apply Layer Styles
to live type layers.In this case
there’s no need to rasterize
them beforehand.
To rasterize a type layer,
right-click on the layer’s
name in the Layer Palette
and choose Rasterize Layer.
If you want to keep the
type layer editable,you can
make a copy of the layer by
dragging it onto the New
Layer icon at the bottom of
the Layers palette.
If you try to do something
that requires the type layer to
be rasterized,Photoshop may
ask you if you wish to do this
first in a warning dialog.
RASTERIZING YOUR TYPE LAYERS
Rasterized type layers act like bitmap layers,
because that’s just what they are.This type has
been rasterized,blurred and adjusted with levels.
StyledType
Layer Styles can be used to create
stunning type effects for any occasion
89ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Text
Quick colour
change
The Colour Overlay
section of the Layer
Styles palette can be
used to quickly change
the colour of your text
without changing
to theType tool
and selecting it.
Save your Styles
Custom Styles can be
saved as presets and
stored for reuse by
clicking the
New Style button in the
Layer Styles palette.
Text can be‘stroked’using the Stroke
section of the Layer Styles.The Stroke
function adds an outline to the text, which can
be useful if you have filled it with a pattern
because the text is more clearly defined.
4
The Pattern option lets you fill the text
with any saved pattern. In this case
we’ve used an American flag that we had
previously saved as a pattern to fill our
New York text.
3
To create text with a bit of relief you can
use the Bevel and Emboss options to
add depth to your text. It helps if the text is
not set to 100% white or black, because the
Bevel and Emboss effects add black and white
shading to create the illusion of depth.
2
With a type layer selected in the Layers
palette you can select Layers > Layer
Styles and choose an option from the
sub-menu to apply that style to the text.
In this case a simple drop-shadow has been
applied.The Layer Styles panel will
automatically pop open.
1
Chapter 8
WORKING WITH
PATHS,VECTORS
AND MASKS
Vectors are totally different
from pixels: vectors are
mathematically defined lines and
curves, which you can use to draw
perfectly smooth shapes and
outlines. Whereas a shape made up
of pixels has a definite size and
resolution, vectors can be of any size
or resolution – they are said to
‘resolution independent’.
Furthermore a vector-based image
will be a very small file when saved
to disk, compared to a pixel-based
bitmap image. The same file could
be used to make a 128x128 pixel
web graphic, or a 5000x5000 pixel
poster. The quality will be perfect in
both situations.
In this chapter…
Learn how to use the
Pen tool to draw paths
Learn how to cut out
objects using paths
and convert them to
selections, and
vice-versa
Work with Vector Masks
to add additional
layering capabilities
to your documents
Learn to use Vector
Shapes and imported
vector artwork
Photoshop has always used vector-based
‘paths’to draw smooth shapes and outlines,
but the latest version has the ability to create
shapes and masks with vectors too
Photoshop has limited capabilities
when it comes to saving vector-only
files but you can include vector
information in a normal Photoshop
file. While this means file sizes
won’t be quite as small as they
would be with a true vector-based
program, you will still get all the
advantages of a vector’s scalability.
Various vectors
In Photoshop, vectors come in
different varieties: first, there’s the
Pen tool, which is used to create
‘Paths’ (Photoshop’s traditional
name for vectors) but there are also
Vector Shapes; these are a new
feature that appears in later versions
of Photoshop which you can use in
their own special layers, instead of
relegating them to the Paths palette.
Paths were an alternative method
for creating selections in Photoshop,
since a path can be loaded as a
selection once it’s been drawn. This
makes them ideal for cutting out
complicated shapes, such as when
you’re removing an object from its
background – useful when the
background is complex and it has
become difficult to select using the
selection tools.
Paths can also be ‘stroked’,
making them an alternative painting
tool. Stroking a path with a brush is
a fun way of turning plain vector
shapes and imported artwork into
complex painted graphics with the
richness of pixel-based brushes.
Shape your behaviour
Vector shapes behave like layer
masks, blocking and revealing parts
of the layer to which they are
applied. You can edit them with the
Pen tool or the Direct Selection tool,
and they offer a further level of
functionality for the program.
Photoshop is not a fully-fledged
vector-drawing application such as
Illustrator, Freehand or Corel Draw,
and probably never will be, but there
is surprisingly good support for
vector drawing in Photoshop.
91ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Vectors
Page 92 Learn how to use paths and
work with the Paths palette
Page 97 Set overlapping vector shapes
to different Boolean modes
Page 95 Add Shape Layers to the layer
stack when you create a vector shape
Page 99 Apply Layer Styles directly
to Shape Layers
Page 93 Use the Freestyle Pen tool to
sketch paths
Page 94 Use the Convert tool to alter
the control points
Using the Pen tools
You can use the tools in the Pen family
to draw all kinds of paths
92 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 8
Control points
Each time you click
with the Pen tool,a
control point is added.
Always try to use as
few control points as
you can,because it
makes the path much
easier to control.
Path options
The Paths palette has
an Options menu,
where you can choose
the size of the display
icon,or choose to
turn it off.
You can combine smooth and sharp
control points in a path to make it both
smooth and angular – simply click without
dragging to place a sharp control point where
you need one.
4
Clicking and dragging pulls out the
Bézier handles from a control point,
turning it into a smooth point.You can use
smooth points to create curved paths, such as
this roughly circular path.
3
The Pen toolgroup contains five
separate tools.The first is the‘normal’
Pen tool. Use this to draw smooth or angular
paths by clicking in the document; clicking
without dragging creates a sharp control
point used to make angular paths, such as this
quadrilateral shape.
2
The Pen tool is located in the ninth row
of Photoshop’s toolbar – it’s easy to find
because it looks just like its name. In older
versions of Photoshop the only place you
could create paths was in the Paths palette.
All the paths you drew would be located here.
1
93ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Vectors
Add anchor points
When using the Pen
tool,the cursor will
automatically change
to the Add Anchor
Point tool whenever
it’s over part of the
path.Just click on it to
add a point.
Quick curves
You can edit the curve
between two points
directly by clicking and
dragging it.The
handles of the two
adjacent points change
simultaneously,but do
not change
their location.
Next is the Add Anchor Point tool.This
tool enables you to add control/anchor
points in between existing points on a path.
The path will not change shape when you add
a point using this tool.
8
The second tool in the Pen toolgroup is
the Freeform Pen tool.With this tool you
can literally draw a path, as opposed to
clicking to place point.Your freehand sketch
will be converted to a path consisting of as
few control points as possible.
7
A Path layer in the Paths palette can
contain more than one separate path
entity. Once you’re finished drawing a path,
[Ctrl]+click to end the Pen drawing action so
you can start a new path. Mac users should
[Command]+click instead.
6
Paths can be open or closed. An open
path does not loop back on itself,
whereas a closed path does.To close a path,
you position the cursor over the starting
control point and the Pen cursor will change
to show a small‘o’next to its pointer.When
you click, the ends of the path will join up.
5
Using the Pen tools continued
94 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 8
Load a path
To load a path as a
selection,[Ctrl]+click
on the path icon in
the Paths palette
(that’s [Command]+
click for Mac users),or
click the‘Load path as
Selection’button at
the bottom of
the palette.
Convert a
selection
You can convert a
selection into a path
by clicking the‘Make
Work Path from
Selection’button in
the Paths palette.
Holding down the [Ctrl] key when any
of the Pen tools are selected activates
the Direct Selection tool (Mac users should
hold down the [Command] key).This is the
prime editing tool for Paths. Use this tool if
you want to move Bézier handles together
without breaking them.
12
You can also use the Convert point tool
to edit the Bézier handles of a smooth
point.When you do this with this tool the
Handles will‘break’– that is, they will move
independently of each other.
11
The final tool is the Convert Anchor
Point tool.This is used to change a
sharp point into a smooth one, and vice-versa.
To use it, click on a smooth point to convert it
into a sharp point (or‘cusp’); drag on a point
to convert a sharp point into a smooth one.
10
The fourth tool is the Delete Anchor
Point tool.This tool does the opposite
of the Add Anchor Point tool: clicking on an
existing point on the path with this tool will
delete it.You might find that the path will
change shape as a result.
9
Next to the Pen tool in the ninth
row of the tool bar is the
Vector Shape tool. This enables you
do draw shapes as vector paths or
vector masks by dragging them out
in the Layers or Paths palette.
With the tool selected you can
choose from the Options bar what
you want to create. You can select
the Pen and Freestyle Pen tool from
the Vector Shape tool’s Options, but
there are also the specific shapes:
Ellipse, Rectangle, Rounded
Rectangle, Polygon and Line.
A third option is the Custom
Shape, which enables you to choose
a shape from the library of designs
that ships with Photoshop.
Vector Shapes
Vector Shapes are new to later versions of
Photoshop – here’s what they do
95ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Vectors
A Vector Shape can be created as a mask for a
solid fill layer,and optionally,as here,have a
layer style automatically applied to it.
Preset styles
If you choose a Layer
Style preset from the
Layer Styles preset
pop-up before you
drag out a shape,that
style will be applied to
the shape.
The Custom Shape option
in the Vector Shape’s Option
bar gains you access to a
large library of custom
vector designs.
This is a Shape Layer: it is
essentially a solid fill layer
with a vector mask.
Layer Styles can be applied
to Shape Layers; here a drop
shadow is applied.
Photoshop comes with a
large collection of custom
vector shapes.
Your shape can be created
in three ways: as a Shape
layer,as a plain vector path
in the Paths palette,or as a
direct pixel fill with no saved
vector attributes.
Whenever vector shapes
overlap in the same layer,you
can choose how they will
react to one another.The
options are: Add,Subtract,
Intersect and Exclude.
HOW TO CREATE CUSTOM SHAPES
UsingVector Shapes
Using the Vector Shape tool in versions of
Photoshop that support vector shape layers
96 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 8
Arrowheads
Arrowheads can be
found in the small pop-
up menu next to the
Custom Shape button
in the Options bar.
Line width options
In Line mode,you can
change the line width
by entering a value in
points in the Options
bar.Hold down the
[Shift] key when
drawing lines to
constrain them to
45-degree angles.
The fourth option is to do away with
any vector information and create the
shape as pixels on a normal layer. Using the
Line Shape option, this is the only way to
simulate the Line tool function in older
version of Photoshop.
4
The second option is to create the
shape as a simple path in the Paths
palette.You do not need to be in the Paths
palette to do this, just click and drag in a layer
– the vector shape is created in the Paths
palette automatically.
3
This creates a Solid Fill Layer and adds
the path as a vector mask to the layer.
Layers in Photoshop 6 and onwards can have
two masks per layer: a vector mask and a
normal layer mask. Here a gradient mask is
used on the layer as well.
2
When you select the Vector Shape tool,
you have three options that determine
how shapes will be applied to your document.
These options are located at the top-left of the
Options bar.The first is Shape Layer mode.
1
97ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Vectors
Add mode
You can also add to
the current vector
mask by turning on
Add mode in the
Boolean options to
the right of the
Options bar.
Chop and change
Make complex vector
shapes by intersecting,
subtracting,adding
and excluding more
simple ones.
You can use the Boolean switches
on existing shapes in a vector mask
as well, just as you can for shapes that you are
about to create. Here we have changed the
mode for the third circle from Subtract to
Intersect mode.
8
In Add mode, the overlapping vector
shapes simply overlap and add
together. However, switching to Subtract
mode turns the next vector that you draw into
a‘cutter’, which you can use to remove
portions of the current shapes.
7
In order to add a vector shape to an
existing shape layer, you must switch to
Path mode and select the Vector Mask Layer.
Now when you drag out a vector shape it is
added to the same vector mask in the
currently selected vector layer.
6
When set to Layer Shape mode,
dragging out additional vector shapes
creates new vector shape layers, which is not
always what you want to happen, and also
precludes the use of the vector shape Boolean
interaction options.
5
Photoshop has more masks than
you might realise. There is an
additional mask in each layer
(besides the background layer, which
is always 100% opaque) that you
don’t usually see. This is because
it’s the layer itself, or rather the
surrounding transparent pixels.
If you paint on a transparent layer,
the brush stroke is surrounded by
transparent pixels. The pixels in the
layer are a mask in their own right.
This can be proved because you can
load it as a selection by [Ctrl/
Command]+clicking the layer icon.
You can also group layers together
into a ‘clipping group’ by [Alt]+
clicking between them on the
separator in the Layers palette – the
cursors will change to overlapping
circles indicating clipping group
mode, and clicking will cause the
uppermost layer to be indented.
The layer will be masked using the
bottom layer’s Layer Transparency
Mask, and its Layer Mask and its
Vector Mask, if these are present.
This enables you to quickly mask
multiple layers using a single layer
or vector mask, and is very useful.
Masks
A bit of detail about masking to help you get
the most out of vector layers and masks
98 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 8
Layer Folders
A Layer Folder (aka
‘Layer Set’) can
actually hold two
masks:a normal layer
mask and a vector
mask,giving you
potential access to
four different masks.
Photoshop 6 introduced a new kind of layer mask: the Vector
Mask.This uses a vector shape to make portions of a layer
transparent and works in tandem with the normal layer
mask.Vector masks are either on or off: they either hide or
show the layer 100%; there is no in-between value like with
normal layer masks, which use 255 grayscale values. But what
happens if you already have a layer mask and a vector mask
on a layer but would really like a third? You can do this
through the use of layer folders. Adding a layer folder and
placing your layer inside it gives you access to two further
masks that can be applied to the folder layer itself.
VECTOR MASKS AND LAYER FOLDERS
If you run out of masks you can always add a folder
A layer folder can be used to add
further masks to a layer if you find
you need more than two
Vector Shape details
We’ll look at some of the options that are
specific to Vector Shapes
99ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Vectors
In a corner
You cannot change
the radii of the
corners of a rounded
rectangle after it has
been created.
Quash confusion
Don't confuse the
Move tool with the
Path Selection tool.
The Move tool does
not have a 'tail' and
cannot be used to
move paths
individually.
The usual copying options apply with
paths as well as selections, so you can
make a copy of a shape by selecting it and
[Alt]+dragging it. Here we’ve duplicated the
arrows, and changed their mode to Add.
4
When editing the shapes you need to
select the Direct Selection tool.Then
you can drag out a marquee around the
points you wish to move. Selected points are
displayed as filled-in dots; unselected ones are
unfilled dots.
3
The Polygon shape tool is used to create
regular shapes of any number of sides.
Here a triangle is created in Subtract mode to
cut a hole in the Rectangle.
2
The Rounded rectangle shape is used to
create rectangular shapes and masks
with rounded corners. Before you drag out the
shape you can set the desired corner size in
the Options bar. Add a Layer Style if you like.
1
Chapter 9
ANNOTATIONS,
NOTES AND THE
MEASURE TOOL
The ‘notations’ tools, Note and
Annotation, can be found in the
tenth row of the toolbar in their own
tool group. The Note tool allows you
to attach informative notes to
Photoshop documents. These can be
read by other Photoshop users when
the document is opened, so the tool
can be very useful when using
Photoshop collaboratively. It can also
be very handy for creating teaching
aids in an educational environment.
Taking this one step further is the
Annotation tool. This allows you to
add sound clips to images that can be
played by double-clicking their icon.
This again provides a useful way to
communicate with others working on
In this chapter…
Add Notes and
Annotations to your
Photoshop documents
Learn which file formats
work with Notes and
Annotations
Use the Eye Dropper
tool to sample colours
from an image
Sample precise pixel
values at different
points of an image with
the Colour Sampler
Along with the creative tools,Photoshop
provides several tools to add accuracy,sound
and vision to your work.These fall into two tool
groups – notation and measurement tools
a project, or for producing learning
aids directly within the program.
Measure for measure
The measurement tools are very
useful utilities in Photoshop. The
Measure tool itself lets you measure
distances and angles, providing you
with precise information that you can
use in conjunction with other tools
in Photoshop. You can measure the
distance between two points, or the
total horizontal distance covered,
plus you can snap the tool to grids
and guides when more precise
measurements are needed.
The Eye Dropper and Colour
Sampler are essential when working
professionally with colour, but are
also very useful on a day-to-day
basis for any Photoshop user. The
Eye Dropper can be accessed in
various ways in Photoshop. For
instance, when the Colour Picker is
open, if you move your cursor off the
Colour Picker panel and over the
image, the cursor automatically
changes to an Eye Dropper, enabling
you to sample the colour of any
pixel. The tool can also be toggled on
and off by holding down the [Alt]
key when a Brush tool is selected.
The Colour Sampler is like the
Eye Dropper tool on steroids. You
can sample a maximum of four
points simultaneously and read their
values in the Info palette. This can
be extremely useful when making
colour adjustments because the Info
palette displays the original values
both of the sampled pixels and the
adjusted values.
Colour by numbers
The great advantage of these colour
measurement tools is that you don’t
need to rely on your eye or the
dubious colour characteristics of
your computer monitor. Instead, you
can see the exact values numerically.
This accuracy is a real bonus for
professional printing needs, but also
for achieving good results on a home
colour photo printer.
101ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Miscellaneous tools and Utilities
Page 106The Colour Sample tool puts
up to four sample points on an image
Page 105 Sampling options can read
the perceived colour from a noisy image
Page 107 Use the Measure tool to help
straighten out crooked images and scans
Page 102 Add notes to images to use
as a handy reminder later on
Page 103 Sound clips can be added to
images,with a microphone
Page 105 Choose the foreground or
backround colour with the Eye Dropper
Notes and Annotations
Make notes and annotations,attach them to
images,and learn how to open and save them
102 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 9
Name change
You can also change
the name in the title
bar by entering a new
one in the field in the
Options bar and
pressing return.
Closing notes
To close a Note click
the close box in the
top-left corner of the
Note’s title bar.The
Note will collapse to
an icon on the image.
Double-click it to
open it again.
To save a document containing a note,
you must use one of three file formats.
These are Photoshop, Photoshop PDF and
TIFF. All the other file formats will discard the
note information, as they do not support it.
4
You can have more than one note in a
document, and in order to differentiate
between them you can choose to give them
different colours.The note’s title bar and its
icon take on the new colour when collapsed.
3
There is not a lot of editing that you can
do to the note text itself, but you can
change the font and set the size.There are
only five preset sizes: Smallest, Small, Medium,
Large and Largest. Smallest and small are
practically unreadable, though.
2
Creating a note could not be easier.
With the Note tool selected you click on
the image where you want the note icon to
appear. A window, like a little Post-It note,
appears where you can enter your text.
1
103ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Miscellaneous tools and Utilities
Take the mic
In order to record an
annotation you must
have a microphone
connected to your
computer’s sound
card or mic input.
Colourful sounds
Annotations can be
coloured using the
colour swatch in the
Annotation tool’s
Options bar.You can
reuse annotations
from other documents.
You can import
annotations
by selecting File >
Import > Annotations.
As with notes, documents containing
annotations must be saved as either
TIFF, Photoshop PDF or plain Photoshop
format. If you don’t want to display
annotations you can hide them using the
View > Show > Annotations menu command.
8
Because the audio annotations are a bit
difficult to see it may be wise to build
your document with spaces to accomodate
them.This is an example of a way to help
guide people to the right annotation.
7
Click on Stop to end recording.There is
no interface for the audio annotation,
you just double-click to hear the recording. If
you look hard enough you can just about see
the icon next to the Annotation tool’s cursor.
6
With the Annotation tool you can attach
a sound clip, usually a spoken sentence,
to an image in a similar way to notes. Clicking
on the image with the Annotation tool opens
a dialog prompting you to start recording.
5
The Eye Dropper tool samples the
colours of individual pixels in an
image, but there is more to it than just
being able to set a new foreground
colour. In LevelsAdjustment, you can
use the Eye Dropper by moving the
cursor over the image, and reading the
tonal values at different points. To see
if the darkest shadows are really black
and the lightest really white, hover the
Eye Dropper over them and read their
values in the Info palette. The palette
can display various colour values –
CMYK, RGB, LAB and so on. With
RGB (Red, Green and Blue pixels)
the darkest pixels should read 0,0,0.
Pure white reads 255, 255, 255 – the
maximum brightness value.
TheEyeDroppertool
The Eye Dropper is an essential Photoshop
tool,especially for achieving colour accuracy
104 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 9
Using the Eye Dropper tool while working with
the Levels adjustment panel allows you to read
the original and adjust values in the Info palette.
Eye Dropper info
You can also use the
Histogram with the
Eye Dropper to read
values and gauge the
distribution of tones
in an image.
Select a sampling method
from the Options bar.Choose
to take a point sample,or
measure the average colour
within 3x3 or 5x5 pixels.
CMYK documents are
destined for print and colour
is critical in this type of
medium.You can check what
colour mode the document is
in the title bar.
Using the Sampler you can
look at the darkest an
lightest points in an image
simultaneously.
The Info palette displays
colour values differently
depending how you have it
set up and what colour mode
your image is in.
The Colour Sampler tool
lets you place multiple
sample points in an image,
marked by‘bull’s eyes’.
The colour values for each
point are displayed in the
Info palette.
THE COLOUR SAMPLE TOOL
Using the Eye Dropper tool
Using the Eye Dropper tool couldn’t be easier,
but it boasts a few less obvious features too
105ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Miscellaneous tools and Utilities
Colour accuracy
The 3x3 average
sample size can be
more accurate,
especially on busy
images where the
colour varies
dramatically.
Get a colour
update
Click and drag over
the image to see the
colour sample update
interactively in
the toolbar.
To get around this there are two other
modes – 3x3 Average and 5x5 Average.
Each mode samples a grid of pixels around the
one you select,sums their colours and takes the
average.The sample is usually a much better
match to the colour you perceive by eye.
4
When in Point Sample mode, selected
from the Options bar drop-down menu,
it can be tricky to sample the perceived colour
of a particular area of a noisy image.The
actual pixels may vary in colour dramatically
and not represent the overall colour of the
particular area of the image.
3
To chose a new background colour,
you could flip the Foreground and
Background swatches using the [X] key, take
a sample and flick back, or simply hold down
the [Alt] key when the Eye Dropper tool
is selected.
2
You can choose a different foreground
colour when painting by selecting the
Eye Dropper tool from the toolbar and
clicking on the image.The tool will sample the
colour of the pixel you click in and store it in
the Foreground Colour swatch.
1
The Colour Sampler
The Colour Sampler tool enables you to take
up to four colour readings at once
106 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 9
Neutral colours
RGB mode stores the
image as three colour
channels,Red,Green
and Blue.If you sample
a pixel and each of the
values for R,G and B are
the same,(say,45,45,45
or 189,189,189) then
you know that pixel is a
neutral pure grey tone.
Colour in
confidence
Using the absolute
colour values is a sure-
fire way of proofing
certain aspects of an
image,since it avoids
the vagaries of
your computer’s
monitor display.
Like the Eye Dropper tool, you can set
the mode for the sample points to be
either single pixels, or averaged pixels (3x3
or 5x5 pixel arrays, around the sample point).
The latter are useful for‘noisy’images.To clear
all the sample points, click the Clear button in
the Option bar.
4
To delete a sample point hold the [Alt]
key down and click on the point – the
cursor turns to a pair of scissors. Alternatively
right-clicking on a sample point will open a
pop-up menu from which you can choose
the Delete command. Mac users will need to
[Ctrl]-click for the latter function.
3
You can move sample points around
after they have been created, and they
are truly permanent. Even if you close the
document, and reopen it the sample points
will have been stored. Displaying colours in
RGB mode in the Info palette helps you gauge
the neutrality of tones in an image.
2
The Colour Sampler tool in the
Eye Dropper tool group (tenth row of
the toolbar) can be used to place multiple
permanent sample points on an image to help
while adjusting the image’s colour.The Info
palette displays the colour reading.
1
The Measure tool
Taking measurements is very useful for
accurate drawings or precise transformations
107ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Miscellaneous tools and Utilities
Diagonal
perfection
Hold down the [Shift]
key to constrain the
Measure tool’s angle to
45-degree increments.
This is useful when you
want to measure a
perfect diagonal.
Auto
measurements
With the Free
Transform tool,
the value will
automatically be
applied after
taking an angle
measurement.If it’s in
the wrong direction,
simply add or delete a
minus sign in front of
the angle value in
the Options bar.
A single line’s angle is displayed too,
which can be useful for straightening
crooked images.You can measure a line that
should be straight and then use the Image >
Rotate Canvas > Arbitrary command.You don’t
need to enter the value you measured,
because it’s already been entered for you.
4
To measure an angle drag out the
Measure tool along one edge, then [Alt]-
drag from the end point to pull out a second
line.The angle between the two lines is
displayed in degrees in the Option bar and
Info palette.
3
The measurement is given in the
Options bar, and the Info palette, in this
case the line is 280 pixels thick.We can now
make a duplicate line with the same thickness
by entering 280px in the Line tool’s Size field.
2
The Measure tool can be found in the
tenth tool group along with the Eye
Dropper tool.You can use this tool to measure
distances, widths and angles directly in the
image. Here we can measure the exact size of
an object by dragging with the Measure tool.
1
Chapter 10
CREATING
TOP QUALITY
ARTWORK
Photoshop has many uses,
ranging from film and
television graphics, to 3D texturing,
to web design, to colour correction
and printing. All are different, yet
Photoshop has the toolset to enable
artists working in totally different
disciplines to get the best results
from their work.
Photoshop is also a superb
photographer’s tool, providing
digital darkroom capabilities that
are second to none. And with the
proliferation of digital cameras
available these days, the importance
of Photoshop as a photographic tool
has never been greater. What’s more,
the ease of workflow and smart
In this chapter…
See how Photoshop’s
tools can be used to
construct a complex,
montage-based
illustration
Learn the tricks of the
trade to create more
professional-looking
artwork
Combine tools to get
the best results in the
shortest time
In this final chapter we’ll put together a piece
of artwork using all the tools and options that
we’ve looked at over the course of this
Photoshop Focus Guide
interface makes Photoshop as easy
to use for home dabblers as it is for
the professional artist.
Creating illustrations
Another use for Photoshop is
creating incredible works of art
and illustrations. These may be
hand-painted, some composite of
photographic or 3D images, or some
wild combination of other media.
In this last chapter we’ll be putting
together an illustration combining
photos with Photoshop filters,
brushes and effects. We’ll need to
draw on the skills and techniques
learned in the rest of the book in
order to create this image, and you’ll
see how the tools used are an
integral part of the creation process,
as well as facilitating the idea itself.
As with any other program, you’ll
need to be aware of the limitations
of Photoshop, or you could end up
painting yourself into a corner.
Often you will need to think ahead
in order to progress smoothly. For
instance, it may be necessary, in
concept, to remove a foreground
element from its background so
that it can be used in the artwork
seamlessly. However, this can be a
very difficult thing to do – arguably
the single most difficult task a
Photoshop artist can be faced with,
especially if the object in question
has an ill-defined edge. Wispy hair
is a classic case; it can be nearly
impossible to extract this from a
background using Photoshop alone.
Indeed, there are a number of third
party plug-ins designed solely to
tackle this very problem.
Eggs and baskets
Do not make the execution of a
difficult task pivotal in the creation
of an image. It may not work, and
if it doesn’t, you’ll be left with
nowhere to turn. Photoshop is a
rich and varied system; explore it
thoroughly and remember any quirks
you discover – you never know
when you may need to use them.
109ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Artwork project
Page 115 Seamlessly blend images
over complex backgrounds
Page 113 Create duplicate brush
strokes by stroking a path
Page 119The illustration is completed
with Vector Shapes and Type elements
Page 110 Selecting and removing a
background is tricky,but worth a try
Page 111 Paint away holes inside a
mask with the Brush tool
Page 112 Reconstruct missing parts
of an image with the Clone tool
Creating a montage
Now we can experiment with a montage
using all the techniques we’ve learned
110 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 10
Experimentation
Because this is a
creative exercise,we
can risk experimenting
with cutting out the
background,since
there may be a
creative solution
to any problems
we encounter.
Background layer
When increasing the
canvas,the
background layer,
which cannot have
transparent pixels,is
filled with the colour in
the background colour
swatch.Set this before
you run the command.
Here’s the resulting selection as a mask.
Not too great, but not bad either. It’s
promising and worth having as a half decent
mask, so let’s keep it and refine it further.
4
Let’s begin by attempting to remove the
background to see how well we can
achieve this.The Magic Wand tool will be first
up to bat. Using the default settings of a
32-pixel tolerance, we shift-click to select each
sector of the background.
3
We intend to apply as many Photoshop
tools as we can, while attempting to
produce as artistic an image as we can.
Cutting out the background in such an image
can be tricky because of the wisps of hair.We
need to keep this in mind before we commit
to a total removal of the background.
2
Here’s the starting image for our
illustration/montage. It’s a straight
portrait of a model, with even lighting and
good all-round quality. It’s also at a high
resolution of about 3,000 pixels.
1
111ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Artwork project
Invert a selection
We could have
avoided this step by
inverting the selection
before applying it as a
layer mask.To invert a
selection (as opposed
to the pixels within a
selection) type
[Alt]+[Shift]+[I].
Inverted layer
masks
If you want to load a
selection as an inverted
layer mask,you can do
so in one action by
[Alt]-clicking the Add
Layer Mask button in
the Layers palette.
At this point we need to make the
canvas area larger. Using the Image >
Canvas Size command we can expand the
document horizontally to 4,000 pixels.
8
The layer mask can be smoothed to
remove some of the graininess by
applying a filter to it. By applying the Gaussian
Blur filter to the mask (not the image part of
the layer) we can vary the smoothness to get
the right effect.This also has the effect of
fading the edges of the subject, which looks
quite cool.
7
The fixed mask is loaded as a selection
and applied as a layer mask to a
duplicate of the background layer. Another
layer has been added below the new layer and
filled with white.The mask needs to be
inverted, which you can do by selecting it in
the Layers palette and typing [Alt]+[I].
6
In Channel view we can see the mask
and the RGB channels at the same time
by clicking the eye icons next to the channels.
The mask is displayed as a rubylith overlay,
just like in Quick Mask mode.This enables us
to paint out the problem areas with careful
use of the Brush tool.
5
Fix missing parts of the image
We can regenerate our subject with the Clone
tool and add shading with the Burn tool
112 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 10
Cut and paste
Another approach is
to use selections to
cut and paste sections
of the skin from other
areas of the image.
Safety layer
If you are unsure of
what you are doing,
try cloning onto a
new layer rather than
the image's own layer.
Make sure Use
All Layers is
checked,though.
To add back some shading we begin by
adding a bit of highlight to the edge of
the arm to match the existing highlight on the
shoulder.We’ll use a textured brush for this,
and the temptation is to simply paint it on by
hand, which is fine, but there is another way.
4
The tones are a bit blotchy but we can
even them out using the Blur tool.
Remember the tip of reducing the Spacing
of the brush to increase the strength of the
effect.This won’t fix everything but it’ll help.
3
We use a hard-edged brush for the edge
of the arm to get a good line for her
arm.The inside parts are filled in using a softer
brush.This can be tricky, but don’t worry if it
looks flat – we can add back the shading later.
2
Using the Clone tool we can paint back
part of the model’s left arm, which had
been cropped off in the original image.
Sampling from skin tones nearby the cropped
part of the image we begin to rebuild the
missing portion.
1
Using the Pen as a brush
We can use the Pen tool to create accurate,
repeatable brush strokes
113ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Artwork project
Sketchy stroke
The technique of
using a pen as a
stroke can be applied
in other ways.You can
give vector shapes
a more 'hand-drawn'
look by stroking them
with sketchy brushes.
Broken paths
Break up a complex
path into different
sections to add
variety and detail to
stroked paths.
The rest of the arm is touched up to
remove any further unevenness in tones
on the skin (the eye is very sensitive to this)
using the Burn and Clone tools.The result is
pretty good, especially if you didn’t know
where to look for the fix-up job.
4
By repeating this action with
successively smaller radius brushes we
can create a nice fake illumination to the edge
of the arm. Each stroke passes in exactly the
same position because of the path.
3
We select the Dodge tool and set up a
large textured brush for it in Midtones
mode at 50% strength. By clicking the Stroke
Path with Brush button selected in the Paths
palette, the Dodge tool will be stroked along
the path.
2
In order to have a bit more precision
when adding the highlight, we can use
the Pen tool.We begin by drawing a path
along the length of the arm.
1
Using the Pen as a brush continued
114 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 10
Keep it real
Overdo a touch-up
job and your subject
can end up looking
like one of those
plastic models on the
front of countless
fashion mags.
Remember to keep
your effects subtle.
Progress report
Use the Zoom tool to
zoom out of the
image to look at the
image as a whole.
This will give you a
good idea of how well
the touch-up is
coming along.
You can be as thorough or as subtle as
you like when using the Healing tool.
In this example we’ve removed the small
wrinkles near the corners of the eye.The right
side has been done and the left side has not.
8
Next we can tackle the occasional
blemish.The odd spot is removed using
the same technique with the Healing Brush
tool. Note that even where there are areas of
high contrast and detail (such as where the
light strikes her face at the edges) the tool will
still work well.
7
The most obvious lines to fix are those
on the brow. Using a brush that’s about
three times the width of the line, we take a
sample just above it and paint it out.You must
be careful not to overdo it and remove all the
lines totally, as it can look too false.
6
The next tool we need to use is the
wonderful Healing Brush.We can use
this to just subtly remove some wrinkles and
blemishes from the model’s face.
5
Adding a background
We can add a colourful background in order to
provide more visual impact
115ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Artwork project
Discard or apply?
When you discard a
mask by dragging it to
the trash,you are
prompted to discard or
apply the mask.
Choosing the option to
Apply cuts away the
masked pixels before
the mask is deleted.
Trash layers
Any layer element can
be deleted by dragging
it to the trash can icon
at the bottom
of the palette.
Next we load the layer mask as a
selection, and then use the Selection >
Feather command and a large value (about
60) to smooth the selection.Then we shrink it
by 20 pixels using the Selection > Modify >
Shrink command.
4
We decide to go with a creative effect to
solve this problem – blurring them until
they are unnoticeable. Before we do that we
remove as much of the white as possible using
an eraser.The layer is duplicated and the mask
is applied to the layer by dragging it over to
the trash beforehand.
3
The render is dragged into the main
Photoshop illustration document by
dragging its layer from the Layers palette and
dropping it over the image. Placed below the
masked layer we can see the edges of the
original background more clearly.
2
The white background was just a
stand-in to enable us to see the effect of
the layer mask.We can replace it with a better
image, such as this.This is not a photo or a
painting, but a 3D render produced using
some special focus rendering effect.
1
Adding a backgroundcontinued
116 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 10
More layers
Always think how
something can be
accomplished without
actually changing any
pixels destructively.
Rather than adjusting
the colours of the girl
layer directly we use
another layer in Colour
blending mode.
Overwrite rules
You will find that
some work you do
earlier will be negated
by later artistic
changes.Don't worry
- it's a part of the
process that even best
laid plans can't avoid.
The Opacity is adjusted to get the right
blend.Too much and the girl’s colours
are washed away; too little and she stands out
too much.The greenish/yellow patch of the
red layer is removed by cloning over it.
8
To blend the colours of the background
and the girl better we can make use of
Photoshop’s blending modes.The red
background layer is duplicated, blurred and
placed above the girl layer. Using Colour
mode, the layer’s colours are transferred to the
girl layer.
7
We can make use of this same selection
again by applying it as a layer mask to
the blurred girl layer and inverting it.This
fades out the blurred portion, blending it into
the background. Levels are used to adjust the
degree of blending.
6
The selection is inverted using
[Alt]+[Shift]+[I] so that only the outer
edges will be affected; the face will stay sharp.
Gaussian Blur is used to blur the edges of the
girl, producing a forced‘depth of focus’effect
and hiding a lot of the white edge.
5
117ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Artwork project
Advanced
blending
Access a layer’s
options panel by
double-clicking it.
Here you can find the
advanced blending
sliders.In this case,the
‘This Layer’slider is set
to Red and the dark
slider moved towards
the right to fade out
those colours only.
Split the sliders
To‘split’the sliders you
[Alt]+drag them.This
has the effect of
feathering the
transparency of the
layer to prevent an
obvious cut-off point
for the blend.
A mask is added to remove the sparks
that cover the girl’s eyes and face.This
is painted on using a large soft brush, varying
the opacity as we go, by making use of the
numeric key pad.
12
The sharp red layer is once again
duplicated and moved to the top.We
want some of the sparks to be in front, as well
as behind, to give some more depth to the
image.The Layer is applied in Screen mode
but most of the flat red colour is removed
using the sliders in its layer options.
11
In fact, the opposite works well too:
applying the duplicated layer in Linear
Dodge mode brightens the girl up, but
likewise it also intensifies the image – it’s time
to make a decision.
10
To intensify the girl layer and add more
contrast to it once more, Layer Blending
modes come to the rescue. The girl layer is
duplicated and applied in Linear Burn mode,
with an opacity of 50%.
9
Applying artistic detail
We can use the Art History Brush here to add
some extra background detail
118 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Chapter 10
All about image
Because the Art History
Brush applies new
pixels using original
colour,you can make
low-res images into
high-res ones.
Effect limitations
Very small images
blown up very large will
start to show pixels and
compression artefacts,
so the effect has
its limits.
A very fine brush is finally applied to
pick out the fine edges.You only need
to do this where needed, because it can be
quite slow.The layer is applied in Hard Light
mode and a Gradient Layer Mask fades out
the left side.The other elements are
repositioned for better composition.
4
Using successively smaller brushes
and changing to the Tight Medium
Art mode, we can add back some detail.The
brushes we used were 200, 100, and then 50
pixels in radius.
3
To get round this we can apply the Art
History Brush to‘regenerate’the pixels
in the enlarged layer.We mark a previous state
as the source for the Art History Brush and
begin filling in the canvas with a large brush in
Dab mode.
2
A selection is made of the girl’s eyes
and copied to a new layer.This layer is
enlarged to fill the document. However, when
you do this, the image quality will suffer.
1
Vector Shape andType layers
We can add further creative elements using
Vector Shape and Type layers
119ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Artwork project
Balancing elements
When creating an
image such as this,try
to balance the
foreground and
background elements,
making sure the
background detail does
not overpower or clash
with the main subject.
Big impression
Using a Hue/Saturation
Adjustment Layer you
can change the feel of
the entire image just by
changing some
of the colours.
Finally, a layer mask is applied to the
Levels Adjustment Layer. Using the
Gradient tool set to black and white and
Radial mode, a gradient is drawn that protects
the girl’s face from the effect of levels.
4
A Levels Adjustment layer is applied to
the image and a Vector Shape is used as
a mask to create a further layer of detail in the
image. A combination of two overlapping
Vector Shapes in Exclude mode interacts to
create an interesting shape.
3
The Warp Text tool helps to bend the
7 into a more interesting shape, and
assists in integrating it into the image depth-
wise. A layer mask aids this further making it
appear to wrap around the girl. Applied in
Screen mode, an Outer Glow Layer Style
makes for a subtle effect.
2
A Type layer is added by clicking on the
image with the Type tool. Appropriately,
the number 7 will be used as a graphic
element for the image, since 7 is the current
version of Photoshop.
1
Onyour CD-ROM/DVD
To access the programs and files
on this disc, including the
photo collection from Image Source,
first insert the disc into your drive.
Whether you’re using a PC or an
Apple Mac, the disc will work
equally well. If it doesn’t run
automatically, look at the opposite
page to find out how to start your
installation manually.
Before you go on
The first item that should appear
on your screen is the disclaimer
window; here you’ll need to click
Featured software…
Video tutorials to take
you through the tools
Every Photoshop
hotkey for PC and Mac
on ‘I Accept’. Please remember that
this disc has been thoroughly
scanned and tested at all stages of
production, but – as with all new
software – we still recommend that
you run a virus checker before use.
We also recommend that you have
an up-to-date backup of your hard
disk before using this disc. Future
Publishing does not accept
responsibility for any disruption,
damage and/or loss to your data or
computer system that may occur
while using this disc, or the data and
programs on it. Please consult your
Here’s how to get the most from the disc
that accompanies your Focus Guide
As well as the printed tutorials in this issue, George Cairns
has supplied a range of video tutorials covering a wide
variety of the tools available to Photoshop users. George will
take you through the basics of each tool, what they are
called, what they do, where they can be found as well as a
brief description of how to use them.
Watch and learn about the following essential tools:Blur tool,Brush
tool,Crop tool,Dodge and Burn tool,Erase tool,Eye Dropper tool,
Gradient tool,Hand tool,Healing tool,History Brush tool,Lassoo
tool,MagicWand tool,Move tool,Note tool and Slice tool.
VIDEO TUTORIALS
The toolbar explained by Photoshop expert George Cairns
Photoshop expert George Cairns takes
you through the tools of the trade in
our superb video tutorials
network administrator before
attempting to install any software
on a networked PC.
Installation
Once inside you’ll find yourself
on our introduction screen, with a
number of options in the menu bar
along the top. Click on the relevant
link in the menu bar to access the
file or program that you require.
If you have a query about your disc’s
interface or content, email our support
team (support@futurenet.co.uk) for
help. If you want to talk to a member
of the team, call 01225 822743.
Please note that we can only provide
basic advice on using the interface
and installing the software. We
cannot give in-depth help on
specific applications, or on your
computer’s particular hardware
or operating system.
121ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
On your CD-ROM/DVD
Finding
your files
Click on the Focus Guide link
at the top of the disc
interface screen to
access all the files that
accompany this book.
The PDF documents on your disc, provided by GFX^TM,
contain every Photoshop 7.0 hotkey for both PC and Mac.
A hotkey is simply a keyboard shortcut that saves you
having to click through on-screen menus with your mouse.
While you may know that pressing [Ctrl]+[C] on your
keyboard is how you would copy a selection, for example,
you may not know that 'Fill from History and Preserve
Transparency' can be accessed by [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Shift]+
[Backspace].These indispensable documents catalogue over
250 keyboard shortcuts and are a useful resource for
Photoshop beginners and experienced users alike.
PHOTOSHOP HOTKEYS
Over 250 keyboard shortcuts for just about any Photoshop task
There’sawealthofPhotoshoptraining
materialandexperienceontheGFX^TM
website:www.user.fundy.net/morris
http://user.fundy.net/morris
Index
A
Add Anchor Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Adjustment
(Levels, Curves and Hue/Saturation). 69, 71, 77
Adjustment layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 77
Adobe Illustrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 91
Alpha channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Annotation, Notes
and Measure tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-107
Anti-aliasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Art History Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 118
Auto measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
B
Backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66-67, 115-117
Bevelled and Embossed type . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Bézier handles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 92, 94
Blending mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Brush dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Brush hardness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Brush shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Brush tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Brushes and Pencil tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-45
Brushes – customisable, preset. . . . . . . . . . . 35
Brushes palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-39
Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-76, 78,79,112
C
Changing Marquees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 65
Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Circular Marquee tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Circular gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 49, 50, 112
Cloning and Healing tools . . . . . . . . . . . 46-53
Cloning skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
CMYK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 104
Color palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Colour Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Colour Sampler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 106
Colour Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Contiguous option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 67
Convert Anchor Point tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Corel Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Corel Painter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Count Jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Creating a montage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-111
Creating Top Quality Artwork . . . . . . 108-119
Custom Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
D
Darken mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Delete Anchor Point tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Destination mode in Healing . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Direct and Path Selection tools . . . . . . . 30-31
Dither . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Dodge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-76, 78, 79,113
Dual Brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
E
Effects tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-79
Elliptical Marquee tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 20
Exposure tools
(Dodge, Burn and Sponge) . . . . 68-69, 75-79
Extrude and Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Eye Dropper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104-105
F
Fade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Feathering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fill tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-58
Finger Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Flow setting for Brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Focus tools (Blur, Sharpen and Smudge)70-74
Focus and Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Foreground to Background,
Transparent and Custom gradients . . . . . . 60
Freehand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 91
G
Gaussian Blur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 111
Gradient, Fill and Eraser tools . . . . . . . . . 54-67
Gradient Masks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Gradient Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Gradients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-65
Graphics tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
H
Healing Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-53
Healing Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 114
Healing Patch tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-53
Highlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 79
History Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-44
Horizontal and Vertical Type . . . . . . . . . 83, 87
I
Intersect mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
K
Kerning, Leading and Scale . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 85
L
Lasso tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Index
Turn straight to the information you need
with the help of our comprehensive index
124 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
125ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE
Index
Polygonal Lasso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Q
Quick Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Quick Mask mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 79
R
Rasterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 83, 88
Rectangular Marquee tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Rubber Stamp (Clone) tool . . . . . . . . . . . 48-50
Rulers, Guides and Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 107
S
Sample mode in Cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Sample mode in Healing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Saturate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Scattering in Brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Scratch disk space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Selecting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Selection tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21, 23
Selections for web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Shadows mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 79
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 37
Single Column/Row Marquee tool . . . . . . 12
Slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Strength slider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 73, 74
Styled Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Subtract mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
T
Textures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Tolerance setting for Eraser tools . . . . . 66-67
Tolerance setting for Magic Wand . . . . . . . 16
Tolerance setting for Paint Bucket . . . . 56-57
Transparency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Layer Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 64, 117
Layer Folders (Layer Sets). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Layer Styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Levels Adjustment layer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Lightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Linear Dodge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Linear gradient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Luminosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
M
Magic and Background Erasers . . . . . . . 66-67
Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17, 56, 110
Magnetic Lasso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Marching ants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20, 64-65, 98
Measure tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 107
Midtones mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-76, 78, 113
Modifying selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Move tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 28-29
Move, Align and Distribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
N
Navigating and Editing Images . . . . . . . 22-31
Navigator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 72
O
Opacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
P
Paint Bucket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-57
Panning and Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Paths,Vectors and Masks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-99
Pattern mode in Healing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Pen tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-93, 113-114
Type and text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Type layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-88, 119
Type masks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Type options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Type Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-89
U
Undo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Use All Layers in selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Using the Brushes and Pencil tools . . . 32-45
Using the Cloning and Healing tools . 46-53
V
Vector Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 95-97, 119
Vector text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
View Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
W
Wacom Intuos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Warp Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 119
Glossary
126 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
Glossary
Finding the lingo a puzzle?Here’s your handy
guide to essential terms found in this Focus Guide
Alpha channel
Alpha channels are stored
alongside colour channels
within Photoshop files but do
not affect the final image
printout. Instead, they store
information that is helpful to
you, such as saved Masks.
Anti-aliasing
Moving pixels around can cause
undesirable jagged edges to
appear, where edited pixels have
not blended smoothly together.
Anti- aliasing refers to the process
of smoothing out these jagged
edges for a more natural look.
Brush
Brushes enable you to paint on
Photoshop images with colour,
other bits of images and pre-
defined patterns. They mimic
real brushes in that you can
alter the size, hardness and
texture in order to achieve the
effects you want.
Colour channel
There are three colour channels
in all colour images: red, green
and blue. Each one contains
information specific to that
colour. Photoshop enables you
to alter each channel
independently, making it
possible to reduce grainy blue
skies without affecting the rest
of an image, for example.
Feathering
Softening the edges of pixels in a
selection, so that they will blend
smoothly when moved elsewhere.
Photoshop does this by only
partially selecting some of the pixels
around the edge of the selection.
Filter
One of Photoshop’s preset tools
that applies an effect to an
image (or a selection within the
image). Examples include
sharpening, blurring, creative
and artistic filters. You’ll find
a complete list by clicking in
the Filter menu at the top of
the Photoshop window.
Font
A commonly used term used to
describe the typeface you are
using. For instance, Times New
Roman is a font where all the
letters look fairly formal. In
Arial, however, all the letters
are far simpler looking.
GIF (or .gif)
A type of image file format best
suited for producing simple
images for the web. Examples
include logos, banners, buttons
and anything made up of only a
few flat colours.
Greyscale
An image is greyscale if it
contains no colour information.
Almost all digital camera files,
for instance, will be in colour.
But you can turn them into
black and white with many fine
gradations of grey, from within
Photoshop by turning them in to
greyscale images.
Image size
This refers to the physical size
of an image. For instance, a
photograph you are working on
may be 20x15cm. This matters
most when you come
to printing out the image.
JPG (or .jpeg)
A type of image file format that
gives a desirable combination of
small file sizes and good quality
photo reproduction. It is
commonly used in digital
cameras to store the images that
you take. The small files sizes
also make it ideal for the web.
Layer
Layers containing effects or bits
of images can be stacked on top
of the original image layer (the
background) in order to change
the appearance of the image.
Layers do not directly affect the
layers beneath them, in the
same way as a blurry piece of
glass placed over a photograph
does not actually affect the
photograph – in both cases, it is
the appearance that is changed,
leaving the original untouched.
Marquee
The flashing dotted outline that
surrounds a selection.You’ll
also see it referred to in some
places as ‘marching ants’.
Navigator
In Photoshop’s default screen
layout, the Navigator is
positioned in the top-right
corner and gives you access to
the whole image, even if you are
currently zoomed in to a
specific part. The red box within
the Navigator image denotes the
area that is currently on screen;
you can move around your
image by clicking and dragging
the red box around the
Navigator image.
Resolution
A measure of how many pixels
make up an image. A resolution
of 300dpi (dots per inch) is
recognised as the minimum
if you’re intending to print
your images.
Selection
Any part of an image which you
select with Photoshop’s tools,
shown by a marquee around it.
You can then work on certain
parts of an image, or remove
then without affecting the rest.
Slices
These are special kinds of
selections for web page design.An
image can be split into segments or
slices, and Photoshop creates an
HTML file, plus separate image
files, for each slice.The web
browser then reassembles the slices
in their original position to give the
appearance of a single image.
Thumbnail
A small, ‘thumbnail-sized’
version of an image. You’ll find
them in folders of images and
in Photoshop’s File Browser –
Because they’re smaller than a
full size image you can browse
through them more quickly,
which makes finding the file
you’re after far easier.
Pixel
An abbreviation for ‘picture
element’, it is essentially a tiny
dot of colour on screen. Most
images are made of up millions
of pixels, which combine to
make an image look seamless.
Zoom in very close on an image,
however, and you can clearly
see these individual pixels.
PSD
Photoshop’s own file format,
which preserves things such as
layers and channels. If you’re
editing an image file, it’s
sensible to save it as a PSD, in
order for the changes you have
made to remain editable when
you next open it.
Tool Options bar
When a tool is selected, the
corresponding Tool Options bar
automatically appears at the top
of the Photoshop window,
giving you access to various
options, including such things
as Brush Sizes and Feathering.
Notes
Notes
Notes
Notes
Adobe photoshop   every tool explained! -Prabhaharan429
Ten chapters of expert tips and advice
All book related CD content can be found
on the magazine cover disc
Master every tool in the Photoshop toolbar
Navigate and manipulate images with ease
Use the Cloning and Healing tools to retouch your photos
Make pixel-perfect selections every time
Harness the power of the stunning Effects tools
Tailor-made video tutorials
Every keyboard shortcut for PC and Mac
FocusGuideFrom the makers of Computer Arts
Adobe
Photoshop
Printed in the UK. © Future Publishing 2004
Free with issue 19 of

More Related Content

PPSX
Photoshop
PDF
Lesson 1 • Introduction to Photoshop
PPTX
Photoshop Guide
PPTX
DAY 2 - Starting in Photoshop (Images and Layers)
PPTX
Top 10 photoshop tools that you need to master photoshop
PPTX
Microsoft Paint Powerpoint
PDF
Adobe photoshop cc - session1
PPTX
Introduction- The Basics of Photoshop CS6
Photoshop
Lesson 1 • Introduction to Photoshop
Photoshop Guide
DAY 2 - Starting in Photoshop (Images and Layers)
Top 10 photoshop tools that you need to master photoshop
Microsoft Paint Powerpoint
Adobe photoshop cc - session1
Introduction- The Basics of Photoshop CS6

What's hot (20)

PPTX
PHOTOSHOP BASICS
PPTX
Photoshop CC
PPTX
Basic Photoshop
PDF
The photoshop CC book volume 1, 2014
PPTX
Adobe Photoshop Tools
PDF
Adobe Photoshop Basics - Session 1
PDF
Adobe Illustrator for beginners
PPTX
Adobe Photoshop: Selection Tools
PPTX
Photoshop
PDF
Photoshop Tools
PPTX
Adobe Photoshop for Beginners
PPTX
Basics of Photoshop Tutorial
PPTX
Adobe Photoshop history
PDF
Adobe Photoshop Basics - Session 2
PPT
Adobe Photoshop
PPT
Photoshop Introduction
PPT
Intro to Adobe Flash
PPTX
Adobe Photoshop Toolbar Introduction
PPTX
Introduction to adobe Photoshop
PPTX
Basic Photoshop Tutorial
PHOTOSHOP BASICS
Photoshop CC
Basic Photoshop
The photoshop CC book volume 1, 2014
Adobe Photoshop Tools
Adobe Photoshop Basics - Session 1
Adobe Illustrator for beginners
Adobe Photoshop: Selection Tools
Photoshop
Photoshop Tools
Adobe Photoshop for Beginners
Basics of Photoshop Tutorial
Adobe Photoshop history
Adobe Photoshop Basics - Session 2
Adobe Photoshop
Photoshop Introduction
Intro to Adobe Flash
Adobe Photoshop Toolbar Introduction
Introduction to adobe Photoshop
Basic Photoshop Tutorial
Ad

Similar to Adobe photoshop every tool explained! -Prabhaharan429 (20)

PDF
PS Comics Tutorial
PDF
Outlook
PDF
Artisteer manual del Usuario
PDF
Peachpit mastering xcode 4 develop and design sep 2011
PDF
6351420 autocad-gstarted(2)
PDF
Manual Photoshop Cs5
PDF
Photoshop 6 classroom in a book
PDF
Branding Guidlines
PDF
Strategies For Real Estate Business
PDF
Strategies for-real-estate-business3809
PDF
10. cutipa portillo, edy dany
PDF
Move the mouse and make billions
PDF
BlenderBasics2ndEdition.pdf
PDF
0321719905
PDF
Acad aug
PDF
tutorial poser
PDF
Manual flash
PDF
162tipsandtricksforworkingwithe learningtools-111207024037-phpapp02
PDF
Keylight ae user guide
PDF
Strategies For Real Estate Business
PS Comics Tutorial
Outlook
Artisteer manual del Usuario
Peachpit mastering xcode 4 develop and design sep 2011
6351420 autocad-gstarted(2)
Manual Photoshop Cs5
Photoshop 6 classroom in a book
Branding Guidlines
Strategies For Real Estate Business
Strategies for-real-estate-business3809
10. cutipa portillo, edy dany
Move the mouse and make billions
BlenderBasics2ndEdition.pdf
0321719905
Acad aug
tutorial poser
Manual flash
162tipsandtricksforworkingwithe learningtools-111207024037-phpapp02
Keylight ae user guide
Strategies For Real Estate Business
Ad

More from PRABHAHARAN429 (20)

PDF
Professional Ethics and Human Values
PDF
NUMERICAL METHODS
PDF
MAKING OF LINE FOLLOWER ROBOT
PDF
Digital Signal Processing
PDF
Power System Analysis!
PDF
Environmental Science!
PDF
Linear Integrated Circuits -LIC!
PDF
Electrical drives lectures
PDF
Micro Processor Lab Manual!
PDF
Microprocessor and Microcontroller Lab Manual!
PDF
Grid Integration Of Large Scale!
PDF
Electromagnetic Theory
PDF
Electron Device Control
PDF
8051 Micro Controller
PDF
Transmission and Distribution.
PDF
Very Large Scale Integration -VLSI
PDF
Measurement & Instrumentation (BE)
PDF
Control For Renewable Energy & Smart Grids
PDF
IQ Gym Grow Your Mind.
Professional Ethics and Human Values
NUMERICAL METHODS
MAKING OF LINE FOLLOWER ROBOT
Digital Signal Processing
Power System Analysis!
Environmental Science!
Linear Integrated Circuits -LIC!
Electrical drives lectures
Micro Processor Lab Manual!
Microprocessor and Microcontroller Lab Manual!
Grid Integration Of Large Scale!
Electromagnetic Theory
Electron Device Control
8051 Micro Controller
Transmission and Distribution.
Very Large Scale Integration -VLSI
Measurement & Instrumentation (BE)
Control For Renewable Energy & Smart Grids
IQ Gym Grow Your Mind.

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
UNIT III MENTAL HEALTH NURSING ASSESSMENT
PPTX
Radiologic_Anatomy_of_the_Brachial_plexus [final].pptx
PPTX
1st Inaugural Professorial Lecture held on 19th February 2020 (Governance and...
PDF
Classroom Observation Tools for Teachers
PDF
GENETICS IN BIOLOGY IN SECONDARY LEVEL FORM 3
PDF
grade 11-chemistry_fetena_net_5883.pdf teacher guide for all student
PDF
Anesthesia in Laparoscopic Surgery in India
PDF
OBE - B.A.(HON'S) IN INTERIOR ARCHITECTURE -Ar.MOHIUDDIN.pdf
PPTX
Lesson notes of climatology university.
PPTX
Cell Types and Its function , kingdom of life
PDF
RMMM.pdf make it easy to upload and study
PDF
ChatGPT for Dummies - Pam Baker Ccesa007.pdf
PDF
LNK 2025 (2).pdf MWEHEHEHEHEHEHEHEHEHEHE
DOC
Soft-furnishing-By-Architect-A.F.M.Mohiuddin-Akhand.doc
PDF
A GUIDE TO GENETICS FOR UNDERGRADUATE MEDICAL STUDENTS
PDF
Microbial disease of the cardiovascular and lymphatic systems
PDF
The Lost Whites of Pakistan by Jahanzaib Mughal.pdf
PDF
Paper A Mock Exam 9_ Attempt review.pdf.
PDF
Weekly quiz Compilation Jan -July 25.pdf
PPTX
Final Presentation General Medicine 03-08-2024.pptx
UNIT III MENTAL HEALTH NURSING ASSESSMENT
Radiologic_Anatomy_of_the_Brachial_plexus [final].pptx
1st Inaugural Professorial Lecture held on 19th February 2020 (Governance and...
Classroom Observation Tools for Teachers
GENETICS IN BIOLOGY IN SECONDARY LEVEL FORM 3
grade 11-chemistry_fetena_net_5883.pdf teacher guide for all student
Anesthesia in Laparoscopic Surgery in India
OBE - B.A.(HON'S) IN INTERIOR ARCHITECTURE -Ar.MOHIUDDIN.pdf
Lesson notes of climatology university.
Cell Types and Its function , kingdom of life
RMMM.pdf make it easy to upload and study
ChatGPT for Dummies - Pam Baker Ccesa007.pdf
LNK 2025 (2).pdf MWEHEHEHEHEHEHEHEHEHEHE
Soft-furnishing-By-Architect-A.F.M.Mohiuddin-Akhand.doc
A GUIDE TO GENETICS FOR UNDERGRADUATE MEDICAL STUDENTS
Microbial disease of the cardiovascular and lymphatic systems
The Lost Whites of Pakistan by Jahanzaib Mughal.pdf
Paper A Mock Exam 9_ Attempt review.pdf.
Weekly quiz Compilation Jan -July 25.pdf
Final Presentation General Medicine 03-08-2024.pptx

Adobe photoshop every tool explained! -Prabhaharan429

  • 1. 132 PAGES! Master every tool in the Photoshop toolbar AdobePhotoshop Everytoolexplained! Unleashthefullpowerbehindevery iconinthePhotoshoptoolbar 132pagesofeasy-to-followtutorials andexpertadvicetohelpdevelopyour AdobePhotoshopskills
  • 3. S tart up Photoshop and what do you see? Well, besides the menu options along the top of the screen, you’ll see a Toolbar that’s chock-a-block with icons. You’ll probably recognise some of these, such as the ‘T’ that designates the Type tool and the paintbrush icon that unlocks the various Brush tools. But do you really know what the rest of these icons mean? … Honestly? The chances are that – like many Photoshop users across the world – you’re only using a fraction of the program’s full potential, but this second issue in the Photoshop Focus Guide series will change all that, helping you make the most of all the tools at your disposal. Even professional designers often admit to being hopeless with the Healing Brush and dodgy with the Dodge tool, but there’s really no reason for any of the tools to be a mystery. This issue will help you get more from the Clone, Gradient, Paths and Effects tools, to name but a few. You’ll find expert tips and advice for working more efficiently with each of the tools, as well as tutorials to demonstrate exactly how to carry out useful image-editing tasks. In the final section you’ll find a step-by-step guide that brings together all the skills you’ve learnt, showing how to create a striking Photoshop image. And let’s not forget the CD that accompanies your Focus Guide. On here you’ll find a library of stock images (worth £1,990), plug-ins and video training tutorials to enhance your enjoyment of Photoshop further still! Have fun! Polish up your knowledge… Unravel the mysteries of the Photoshop Toolbar and its resident icons.They’re not as scary as they look! 3ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Welcome
  • 4. Editor Dan McNamara Art Editor Simon Bleeze Writer Simon Danaher Production Clive Somerville Jonathan Palmer Cover image Chris Stocker New Media Co-ordinator Matt Gallimore Production Co-ordinator Diane Ross Group Publisher DaveTaylor Publishing Director JohnWeir Distributed through the UK Newstrade by Seymour Distribution, 86 Newman Street,LondonW1T 3EX Overseas Distribution by Future Publishing Ltd. Printed in the EU Future Publishing Ltd 30 Monmouth Street, Bath BA1 2BW www.thefuturenetwork.plc.uk We recommend that you always maintain an up-to-date backup of your hard disk data. Future Publishing does not accept any responsibility for disruption,damage and/or loss to your data or computer system that may occur while carrying out procedures described in this publication. Future Publishing is part of The Future Network plc. The Future Network produces carefully targeted specialist magazines and websites for groups of people who share a passion.We aim to satisfy their passion by creating titles that offer superb value for money, trustworthy information, multiple ways to save time and money, and are a pleasure to read or visit. Today we publish more than 80 magazines and over 30 magazine websites and networks from offices in four countries. The company also licenses 32 of its titles resulting in over 60 local editions in a further 23 countries.The Future Network plc is a public company quoted on the London Stock Exchange (symbol: FNET). Non-executive Chairman Roger Parry Chief Executive Greg Ingham Chief Operating Officer & Managing Director, UK Colin Morrison Finance Director John Bowman Tel +44 1225 442244 www.thefuturenetwork.plc.uk Bath • London • Milan • New York • Paris • San Francisco All contents © Future Publishing Ltd, 2003 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior permission of the publisher. Websites mentioned in this publication are not under our control. We are not responsible for the contents of these sites or any changes or updates to them. None of the information in this guide is intended as legal advice.The articles are for information purposes only. 4 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
  • 5. With so much to say about Adobe Photoshop it’s been difficult to cram all the information that we wanted to include into this Focus Guide. That’s why you’ll find the special icons that occupy the margins so very useful. As you leaf through the pages, you’ll find a range of attractive symbols, each of which denotes an extra nugget of knowledge. The icons enable you to identify exactly what kind of information you’re dealing with – for a full guide to icon categories, see below. These handy hints, tips and shortcuts are always relevant to the topic that’s being discussed, and will help you develop your Photoshop skills that little bit faster. Our writers are always experienced Photoshop experts who regularly contribute to our sister magazines, such as Computer Arts and Digital Camera Magazine. So you can rest assured that all the information they provide is both authoritative and thoroughly tried-and-tested. Finding your way Read this Guide from beginning to end or dip in and out as you please.Either way,our icons will prove indispensable… 5ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Icons explained On your CD-ROM Some of the software that we refer to may be included on your bonus CD.Every now and then we remind you of this by flagging up the disc icon and listing what’s on it.Handy,eh? Top tips This indicates an expert tip.Anything sheltered beneath this icon is guaranteed to reveal a useful hint about using Photoshop’s extensive range of tools,palettes and features. Further information We’d like to tell you absolutely everything,but there’s just not enough space.Instead we refer you to other useful resources,such as websites and specialist books for further reading. Shortcuts Carrying out common tasks again and again can get a little tedious.Our handy shortcuts show you how to carry out these tasks with a few deft key-presses,saving you lots of time and effort. Take note You’ll find a number of these nuggets of knowledge scattered throughout the Guide.They’re crammed with useful information that complements the main text perfectly. Watch out! The skull and crossbones sign means proceed with caution.You’ll find some important points outlined below this icon,which you should certainly take seriously. Links When we refer to a website,we may pull out the web address in the sidebar to make it easier for you to read and remember.
  • 6. 6 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Contents CONTENTS Selections 1 SELECTIONTOOLS IN PHOTOSHOP 10 Making selections is the core of Photoshop’s way of working.There are a variety of tools you can use for the purpose,so here’s how to get the most out of them BASIC SELECTION TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 THE LASSO TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 THE MAGNETIC LASSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 THE MAGIC WAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 QUICK MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 WORKING WITH THE QUICK MASK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 SELECTIONS, MASKS AND CHANNELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 SLICES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Navigation and manipulation NAVIGATING AND EDITINGYOUR IMAGES 22 Getting around inside an image is important if you are to work quickly and efficiently. This chapter covers the view navigation tools and shortcuts for managing your workspace2 PANNING AND ZOOMING IMAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 THE NAVIGATOR PANEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 VIEW MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 MOVE, ALIGN AND DISTRIBUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 THE MOVE TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 DIRECT AND PATH SELECTION TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 VECTOR SHAPES AND MULTIPLE PATHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
  • 7. 7ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Contents Brushes and Pencil tools USINGTHE BRUSHES AND PENCILTOOLS 32 This chapter introduces you to Photoshop’s more arty tools,the Brushes. But as you’ll discover,you can use these versatile tools for far more than just painting3 THE BRUSH TOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 USING BRUSHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 EXPLORING THE BRUSHES PALETTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 THE BRUSHES PALETTE IN DETAIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 SCATTERING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 TEXTURES AND DUAL BRUSHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 THE HISTORY BRUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 USING THE HISTORY BRUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 ART HISTORY BRUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 4 THE RUBBER STAMP (CLONE) TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 REMOVING UNWANTED ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CLONING SKIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 THE HEALING BRUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 THE HEALING PATCH TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 5 THE PAINT BUCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 MORE FILL OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 THE GRADIENT TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 THE GRADIENT EDITOR PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 USING GRADIENTS CREATIVELY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 GRADIENT STYLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 GRADIENT MASKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 MASKS AND SELECTIONS IN DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 MAGIC AND BACKGROUND ERASERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Cloning and Healing tools USINGTHE CLONING AND HEALINGTOOLS 46 The Cloning and Healing tools in Photoshop offer an elegant way to fix damaged photos, correct bad scans and generally clean up your images.And they’re great fun to use Gradients,Fills and Erasing THE GRADIENT,FILL AND ERASERTOOLS 54 Once you get more competent with Photoshop you’ll appreciate the importance of these utility tools.The Gradient tool in particular is essential for all manner of tricks and effects
  • 8. 8 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Contents 6 THE ‘FOCUS’ TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 THE BLUR TOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 THE SHARPEN TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 THE SMUDGE TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 WORKING WITH THE SMUDGE TOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 DODGE AND BURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 THE SPONGE TOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 USING DODGE AND BURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 FOCUSING IN WITH DODGE AND BURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 7 THE TYPE TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 TYPE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 TYPE TOOL TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 USING THE WARP TEXT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 RASTERIZING TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 STYLED TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 8 USING THE PEN TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 VECTOR SHAPES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 USING VECTOR SHAPES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 MASKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 VECTOR SHAPE DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Effects Tools GETTINGTO KNOW THE EFFECTSTOOLS 68 Photoshop’s effects tools include Blur,Sharpen,Smudge,Dodge and Burn.Discover how best to use them to spice up your artwork,composites and photographic images Text WORKING WITHTHETYPETOOL 80 Creating text in Photoshop is quite easy to do,whether it’s for artistic effect or simply to add essential information.This chapter looks at the various options available with theType tool Vectors WORKING WITH PATHS,VECTORS AND MASKS 90 Photoshop has always used vector-based‘paths’to draw smooth shapes and outlines. Learn how the latest version has the ability to create shapes and masks with vectors too
  • 9. 9ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Contents CD PAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 GLOSSARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 9 NOTES AND ANNOTATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 THE EYE DROPPER TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 USING THE EYE DROPPER TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 THE COLOUR SAMPLER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 THE MEASURE TOOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Miscellaneous tools and Utilities ANNOTATIONS,NOTES ANDTHE MEASURETOOL 100 Along with the creative tools,Photoshop provides several tools to add accuracy,sound and vision to your work.These fall into two tool groups – Notation and Measurement tools Essential information CD PAGES AND RESOURCES 120 Your essential guide to the software on your disc. Plus our handy glossary and index 10 CREATING A MONTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 FIX MISSING PARTS OF THE IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 USING THE PEN AS A BRUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 ADDING A BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 APPLYING ARTISTIC DETAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 VECTOR SHAPE AND TYPE LAYERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Artwork project CREATINGTOP QUALITY ARTWORK 108 In this final chapter we’ll put together a piece of artwork using all the tools and options that we’ve looked at over the course of this Photoshop Focus Guide
  • 10. Chapter 1 SELECTION TOOLSIN PHOTOSHOP In earlier versions of Photoshop there was no Select tool – one that looked like a traditional arrow cursor, that you would use to select ‘objects’. Because Photoshop dealt primarily with pixels, it made no sense to have a Select tool – there were no ‘objects’ to select. Instead, the selection tools were default tools – ones you used automatically, to begin editing. In Photoshop 7.0 there is an arrow tool for selecting objects, since the introduction of vector shapes (those drawn using a series of points or ‘vectors’) made this necessary. Despite this, the selection tools, in their many and varied forms, are still In this chapter… Discover how the Photoshop selection tools work Learn how to make accurate selections Create partial or gradient selections Making selections is the core of Photoshop’s way of working.There are a variety of tools you can use for the purpose,so let’s take a look at how to get the most out of them the main tools for doing 90% of the tasks in Photoshop. Selections are an essential part of understanding Photoshop’s methods and central to the way the program works – making a selection then performing an action on that selection is the basic workflow. The better you become at Photoshop the better you’ll become at making selections and vice-versa. No need for discretion What’s important to understand, though, is that selections are not necessarily discreet. They don’t have to define rigidly what is or is not selected – they can be partial too.
  • 11. It is perfectly possible to make selections so that some pixels are 100% selected and others are 100% unselected, and in between there is a selection gradient, where pixels are partially selected. This is how you create effects that blend smoothly into existing pixels, and this also forms the basis of ‘anti-aliasing’ – smoothing jagged, pixelated edges. Feathering is the most basic implementation of gradient selections in Photoshop. When making a rigid selection using one of the Marquee tools for instance, you can tell Photoshop to make the edge of the selection slightly soft, or ‘feathered’. This effectively creates a border around the selection where some of the pixels are partially selected, smoothing whatever effect or operation is applied to the selection, or merely preventing jagged edges. The soft option By making the feathered edge larger, you’ll be able to create very soft selections, and this is very useful when making photo-montages, for instance, or retouching images. We’ll look at how anti-aliasing and feathering are implemented in Photoshop’s selection tools, and how you can use them to achieve professional results quickly and easily. 11ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Selections Page 17The Magic Wand tool selects an object in an image to change the colour Page 20 Photoshop can convert channels into selections and vice-versa Page 18 Quick mask mode turns any painting tool into a selection tool Page 12The Circular Marquee tool makes an elliptical selection Page 13 Single Column marquees are used to select only certain columns Page 15The Magnetic Lasso lets you make detailed selections with ease
  • 12. Basic Selection tools Let’s take a look at the various tools in the toolbar available for making selections 12 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 1 Changing marquees Holding down the [Alt] key will change the marquee mode so that the selection expands from the centre,rather than the corners,as you drag. Shifting around Rather than using the buttons you can hold down modifier keys to add and subtract selections.To add,hold the [Shift] key before you begin to click and drag.To subtract hold the [Alt] key before you click and drag.The marquee cursor will change to show which mode you are in. In Subtract mode, you can remove areas from the current selection. Here we changed to the Circle Marquee tool to subtract an elliptical shape from the rectangular selection we had made.You can continue to make negative selections that chip away at the current selection.This is a good way to refine a selection to fit a specific shape in an image. 4 The Options bar displays tool-specific settings.The selection tools all have a set of four buttons that change the effect that subsequent selections have on the one that’s currently active.The normal mode is New Selection – each time you click and drag,a new selection is made and the current one is lost. Add mode makes the current selection larger and a different shape. 3 The Circular Marquee works in exactly the same way, except the selection will be elliptical.With both tools you can constrain the selection so it is either a perfect circle or a perfect square by holding down the [Shift] key while you drag. Lift your finger off the [Shift] key while still holding the mouse button down to switch back to unconstrained mode. 2 The Rectangular Marquee tool is the first tool in the Toolbar, and is used to select rectangular areas of an image. It’s simple to use – just select the tool and drag across the image to select the area you want. By default the tools works in corner-to-corner mode. Dragging from top-left or bottom-right creates the marquee. 1
  • 13. 13ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Selections Short intersection To activate Intersect mode without using the buttons hold down the [Alt} and [Shift] keys before you drag. Perfect circle If,after dragging while holding down the [Shift] key,you want to force the selection to be constrained to a perfect circle or rectangle, release the [Shift] key momentarily and press it again.Holding the [Alt] key while dragging will force a selection to be drawn from its centre as mentioned. If already holding the [Alt] key,such as when using the Intersection shortcut,momentarily release it and then press the [Alt] key. This forces the ‘constraint from centre’to occur. Uses for the Single Row and Column Marquees are varied, but not always obvious. Here, they’re used to create multiple random vertical and/or horizontal lines in an image much more quickly than using the Pencil or Line tool.The Add Selection mode was used and the selections filled with black, on separate layers, to create lines whose opacity and blending mode we can vary. 8 The last two selection types in this tool group are the Single Row and Single Column Marquees.These are special types of marquee which, as their name suggests, select either a single row or column of pixels. In this case dragging only defines which row or column in the image is selected and the selection extends to the edges of the image in either mode. 7 This is the result of the intersection. Note that it’s only the overlapping parts of the two selections that remain selected. This selection method is not used very often but you’ll appreciate just how handy it can be in certain situations. Creating similar selections any other way would be very difficult and time-consuming. 6 The fourth mode is Intersect.When in this mode, you can create a new selection that is the intersection between the currently active one and one you will drag out. Basically all parts of the current selection will disappear except that portion that overlaps with the new selection you drag out. Here is the original selection with a new one being dragged out over it, using the Intersect mode. 5
  • 14. The Lasso tool is a free-form selection tool. You can use it like a pen to draw your selection border by hand. When using the Lasso tool selections can be any shape you like, but it can be hard to be precise because selection must be drawn in a single motion. The Polygonal Lasso is much easier to use, and can be found in the Lasso tool pop-up in the toolbar. This enables you to click from one point to another to create straight line segments to make up your selection. All you need to do is double-click, or click on the starting point of the selection to end it and consequently close your selection. The LassoTools The standard,Polygonal and Magnetic Lassos are ideal for creating complex selections 14 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 1 Using the [Alt] key technique allows you the best of both worlds,drawing straight sections or detailed curves as and when you need to Poly-gone When using the Polygonal Lasso holding down the [Alt] key invokes the normal Lasso tool. Releasing the [Alt] key reverts back to the Polygonal Lasso. Combined Lasso With the Lasso tool active,just hold down the [Alt] key at any stage to turn it into the Polygonal Lasso. THERE ARE two ways in which to work using the [Alt] shortcut. Assuming you have the normal Lasso tool selected, if you keep the [Alt] key held down when you click and drag, the tool will behave like the normal Lasso. IF YOU want to get really precise, then the Magnetic Lasso is the key. With this selection tool you can draw close to the edge of the object you wish to select and the tool will figure out where the boundary should be and adjust the selection to fit. YOU CAN set the Frequency high to place lots of points as you drag. This can be handy for jagged edges. A LOW Frequency is also useful when you don’t need the added complexity of hundreds of anchor points, but can make do with a less precise selection. LASSO OPTIONS ROUNDED UP
  • 15. The Magnetic Lasso If you want detailed selections without too much effort,here’s the perfect tool for the task 15ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Selections Fast pan and zoom You can use the Pan and Zoom shortcuts to move the image around while still in mid-selection.See Chapter 2 for more about navigating and editing your images. Magnetic switch Hold the [Alt] key to activate the Polygonal Lasso tool when using the Magnetic Lasso. Another trick to help on very low contrast portions of an image, such as where the pumpkin stalk is in front of the girl’s face again, it can help to increase the Frequency setting.This will cause the tool to place anchor points more often, therefore reducing the span of pixels it has to analyze as you drag the mouse. 4 This is a problem of contrast. By reducing the Edge Contrast setting in the Option bar you can help the Magnetic Lasso to detect edges that are lower in contrast. But you will still need to manually add anchor points by clicking, to help the Lasso do this. 3 If the area you are tracing is too indistinct and low in contrast for Photoshop to find an edge itself, you can click the mouse to force an anchor point to be placed.The default setting in the Options bar is fine most of the time, but there can be problems – here, the tool has no problem with the edge of the hair, but it didn’t seem to detect the pumpkin stalk. 2 This tool lets you make more detailed selections, particularly of specific objects in an image, without requiring too much effort.You don’t have to keep the mouse button held down when drawing either – click once to start, drag close to the object edge, then double-click to end. Note that the tool automatically places‘anchor points’as you draw to keep the selection in place. 1
  • 16. The MagicWand The Magic Wand is a special selection tool, used for selecting areas of similar colour 16 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 1 Unrestricted colours When the Contiguous setting in the Options bar is checked, Photoshop makes a selection of similar- coloured pixels that are also physically joined to your starting point.Disable this setting and similar colour pixels across the whole image will be included,which can take a few moments. Use All Layers The Use All Layers option allows you to calculate the selection based on how the image actually appears on screen when working with multi-layered documents. If this is left unchecked,then only colours on the currently selected layer will be analysed for similarity. We can improve the ability of the wand to select the colours we want by increasing the Tolerance setting, from the default 32, to 50 then [Shift]+clicking in each of the separate areas. Any other parts of the jumper still not selected can be added by [Shift]+clicking on them again until you have a good clean selection with no‘islands’. 4 The Magic Wand will only select colours within a certain range, defined by the Tolerance setting. And it will only look at contiguous pixels – that is, ones that actually touch each other. Areas of colour not directly connected, like the chest and other arm, are not considered for selection. 3 Most images don’t contain large areas of flat colour like the one above,so here’s a more typical use for the MagicWand – selecting the girl’s jumper to change its colour.Using the MagicWand,we can click on a section of the jumper to select all pixels with a similar colour. However,using the default setting there are many‘islands’of unselected pixels,so not all of the jumper has been selected. 2 The Magic Wand tool is used to select areas using a single click.The tool works by sampling the colour of the image where you click and then looking at all adjacent pixels for those that are the same or similar in colour.Take a well-defined shape like the one here and click in it with the Magic Wand – the whole shape is selected in one go. 1
  • 17. 17ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Selections Colour tweaks The Hue/Saturation panel lets you adjust the whole spectrum or individual sectors of the colour spectrum.Choose these from the pop-up menu. Let it slide The sliders at the bottom of the Hue/Saturation panel enable you to adjust the range of colours affected in each sector. By selecting the layer mask and applying the Gaussian Blur filter with a smallish value we can make the layer mask slightly bigger.Then by applying Levels to the layer mask we can make the blurred edges brighter, controlling how much of the Hue/Saturation effect is applied to this area. 8 If we zoom into the document we can see that there is a slight fringe of red. This is because some of the jumper that overlaps the background was left unselected. This is a limitation of the tolerance setting used by the Magic Wand. Fortunately, there is a way we can fix this. 7 By adding a Hue/Saturation Adjustment Layer while the selection is still active, you can change the colour of the the jumper, and only the jumper. Photoshop creates a layer mask from the selection and uses is to limit which areas of the adjustment layer will actively affect the layers below. 6 Here you can see that a part of the arm has been selected.This is due to the high tolerance setting used.You can easily remove it from the selection, but first reduce the tolerance to a lower value, such as 24, then [Alt]-click on the arm inside the selection to remove it. 5
  • 18. Quick Mask Quick Mask is not a tool as such,but a mode you can enter when working with selections 18 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 1 Fill the gaps Holes in a Mask or Quick Mask can be filled by selecting the inside or outside area and applying the Minimum filter. Keep it sharp Apply the Minimum filter to a copy of a layer using the Overlay mode to give you a‘live’ sharpening layer. While in Quick Mask mode, therefore, you can use any of the normal painting tools to modify your mask, and hence your selection.You can see that Photoshop offers a huge amount of freedom when creating selections, and this is indicative of how important selections are when using Photoshop. Here, the Paintbrush tool is being used to clean up the mask. 4 The red overlay is slightly transparent so you can see what it beneath. Red areas are masked out (unselected) while clear areas are unmasked (selected). But internally, Photoshop stores the mask in shades of grey, not red – so this is how the mask looks to Photoshop. 3 By clicking the Quick Mask button at the bottom of the toolbar, or pressing the [Q] key, the selection is converted to a mask.The mask is displayed, not in shades of grey, but as a semi-transparent overlay.This mimics the techniques used in traditional printing where a red‘rubylith’overlay is used to mask out parts of a photo or artwork. 2 When any selection is active,no matter which of the selection tools you started off using,you can enable Photoshop’s Quick Mask mode.Here is a less-than-perfect selection we have made using the Magic Wand. 1
  • 19. When painting, take notice of the foreground colour indicated in the bottom of the toolbar. When in Quick Mask mode this will only indicate shades of grey, so any colours you have set will appear grey. Hitting the [D] key sets the colours to the default, white and black. As you paint you can use the [X] key to reverse the background and foreground colours so that you can paint in white (unmask) or black (mask) to edit the mask. Once you have touched up the mask, you can press the [Q] key once more to exit Quick Mask mode. You’ll then be able to convert the edited mask to a selection. Working with the Quick Mask The Quick Mask lets you create a ready-made mask,which you can edit or turn into a selection 19ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Selections Make use of the foreground and background switch key [X] to flip between masked and unmasked colours Disappearing ants To hide the‘marching ants’while a selection is active use the [Crtl]+[H] shortcut (that’s [Command]+[H] for Mac users).Be careful to remember that you have a selection active though! Hiding applications To hide other applications on a Mac and leave only Photoshop visible,type [Command]+[Alt]+[H]. On PCs,Photoshop has an application background window, so this is not applicable. IF YOU need to make a selection slightly bigger all the way round, you can do so using the Select > Modify > Expand menu command. A dialog will appear in which you can enter the number of pixels by which you wish to expand the selection. YOU CAN contract a selection by using the Select > Modify > Contract menu command.To make a selection larger by a specified number of pixels around it, choose Select > Modify > Expand from the menu. TO SOFTEN a selection and make its border less jagged, you can use the Select > Feather menu command, enter a value in pixels (from 1 to 250) and click OK. IF YOU need to modify just the border of the selection area you can select it using the Select > Modify > Border.This is useful for creating special edge effects, in combination with some filters, like Torn Edges. HOW TO MODIFY YOUR SELECTIONS
  • 20. Selections,Masks and Channels Let’s look at selections in a little more detail to see how how they relate to layers and channels 20 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 1 Alpha channels The term alpha channel simply means any extra greyscale channel saved along with the three RGB channels,or four CMYK channels,that make up a colour image file. Photoshop files can store many of these alpha channels at once. Channel selection [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Shift]+click on a channel to load the intersection of the current selection and a channel. To reload a channel as a selection once again,click the Load Channel As Selection button at the bottom-left of the Channels palette. A better technique is to press [Ctrl] (or [Command] on a Mac) while clicking on the channel icon directly – we can load the larger ellipse as a selection (by pressing [Ctrl/Command] while clicking on it) then subtract the smaller ellipse by pressing [Ctrl/Command]+[Alt] while clicking its icon in the Channel palette. 4 Now that the selection is saved as a channel, we can drop the selection and continue to make new ones. It’s only possible to have one selection active at a time, so saving them to a channel is a convenient way to store them for use later on. Here we’ve created another selection and saved it as another channel. It’s just a larger ellipse. 3 We can convert the selection into an ‘alpha’channel by switching to the Channels tab and clicking the Save Selection As Channel button, (second from the left at the bottom of the palette).The selection is then represented by a greyscale image. 2 As we’ve seen with the Quick Mask mode, selections are handled internally by Photoshop as a greyscale image or‘mask’. White areas in the mask are pixels that are fully selected, black areas are fully unselected and grey areas are partially selected. Let’s create a simple selection using the Elliptical Marquee tool. 1
  • 21. Slices Slices are special kinds of selections for web page design,before the Image Ready stage 21ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Selections Reassembled slices When you save the sliced page Photoshop creates an HTML file plus separate image files for each slice.When the HTML file is read by a web browser all the slices are reassembled in their original position, giving the appearance of a single image once again. Keep it tidy Hold the [Ctrl] key while using the Slice tool to toggle the Slice Select tool on and off. Use this to select a slice and drag its edge handles to resize it.Be careful not to have any unnecessary ‘sliver’slices between the main slices.Zoom in to check they all butt up against each other nicely. Now choose File > Save ForWeb to open Photoshop’s web compression tool.In this panel,you can select each slice and apply precisely the compression most suitable.For example,a photo saved as high quality JPEG, the text as a medium quality JPEG and the graphics as GIFs.The backgrounds can be saved as low quality JPEGs.This sliced,higher quality image is only 5k larger than our first attempt. 4 Using the Slice tool we can divide up the image into sections. It’s simple to use – just select the tool and drag out marquees to cut the image into appropriate boxes. Photoshop automatically adds extra slices where necessary to keep everything rectangular because each slice essentially becomes a separate image file. 3 The problem here is that the different kinds of graphics element on the page really need to be saved individually using the compression settings best suited to each. We can’t do this without using slices in Photoshop. As this pretty extreme example shows, achieving a small file size causes most of the elements to look terrible. 2 Here’s an example of where slicing can really help.This is an example web page, containing text, a background, a photographic image and graphics created in Photoshop. Obviously, for the web we want the page to download as fast as possible but also look as good a possible. 1
  • 22. Chapter 2 NAVIGATING AND EDITING YOUR IMAGES Being able to zoom and pan an image is important when working on a Photoshop document. Like all other aspects of the program there is more than one way to get around an image, manage your windows and documents, and generally navigate the Photoshop landscape. Similarly you’ll need to be able to work with the elements within a document, such as masks, layers, floating selections, paths and vector masks. There are a number of tools to accomplish these tasks. As mentioned before, Photoshop is not an object-based 2D program – that is, you work directly with the pixels of a layer until you explicitly In this chapter… Learn how to pan and zoom images Discover how to select and move layer elements Use shortcuts to scale and pan the view Work more efficiently and productively Getting around inside an image is important if you are to work quickly and efficiently.This chapter covers the view navigation tools and shortcuts for managing your workspace do something to change that fact, such as creating a new layer on which to paint. In some 2D programs, every time you paint a stroke or apply an effect, a new object is created. While this gives you a totally non-destructive way of image editing, it can make managing your document a very complicated procedure. In Photoshop it’s much more straightforward. Painting in layers If you paint on an image layer, stop say, to change colour, then paint over what you just did, the result destructively alters those pixels in the layer. It’s much like painting in
  • 23. the real world, except in Photoshop you have an Undo command. If you need to paint over the top of existing artwork and be able to go back and change the position, size, colour and opacity of those strokes later on, then you have to paint on a new layer. This holds true for any other aspect of the program where new pixels are created. While the Selection tools – the Marquee, Lasso and so on – are used to select pixels within a layer, there are other tools for selecting and moving layer elements themselves. These include the Move tool, the Path Select tool and the Direct Selection tool for dealing with vector-based elements. It’s important to learn the difference between them, and we’ll examine these differences more closely in the following pages. Old and new The Path Select and Direct Selection tools are not easy to find in older versions of Photoshop. The Path Select tool used to be part of the Pen tool group, but can now be found in its own tool group on the toolbar. Many revisions have been made to both the menus and toolbar, but rest assured that most of the information in this book also applies to older versions of Photoshop. 23ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Navigation and manipulation Page 24 Use the Zoom and Pan tools to navigate your images on screen Page 25The Navigation palette is great for giving an overview of the whole page Page 26 Manage your screen space when multiple documents are open Page 31 Use the Direct Selection and Path tools to work with paths and vectors Page 29 Quick 3D effects are possible using the Move tool in copy mode Page 28The Move tool enables you to navigate your layers with a pop-up menu
  • 24. Panning and Zooming images Here we show you the basic navigation tools available for viewing your image 24 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 2 100% accuracy To zoom the image so that it is at exactly 100% scale,double- click the Zoom tool in the toolbar. Viewing options Use the buttons in the Option bar to zoom the image to full size, print size or to make it fit on screen. Two useful options are the Resize Window To Fit and Ignore Palettes options in the Zoom tool’s Option bar.With the former option enabled the window will change size along with the image, and with the latter option enabled the window will continue to extend below any open palettes, though not the toolbar. 4 To zoom out again, either click the Zoom Out button in the Option bar and click in the image, or hold down [Ctrl] and click (that’s [Option]+click on a Mac). If the image extends past the borders of the window you can pan the image by clicking on the Pan tool, or holding the Space Bar at any time and dragging in the window. 3 At the bottom of the toolbar are the Hand (which we’ll refer to as the Pan tool) and Zoom tools. Click the Zoom tool then click on your image to zoom in. Eventually you’ll zoom in so far that the individual pixels will become visible as large blocks of a single colour.You’ve exceeded the resolution limit for the image on your monitor, but getting this close is often very useful. 2 When you open an image in Photoshop it is automatically scaled so that the whole image is visible at once.The scaling factor is displayed as a percentage in the window’s title bar. But how do you zoom in to see more detail in a large image? As is often the case when using Photoshop, there are a number of different options. 1
  • 25. The Navigator panel A useful device for getting around documents is the Navigator panel.Here’s how it works 25ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Navigation and manipulation Navigator panel This can be very useful when working on multiple monitor set-ups.You can have a full-screen preview of your image on one monitor while you work up close on another.This prevents you continually zooming in and out to see how the editing looks relative to the rest of the image. A different scale Some previous versions of Photoshop do not allow incremental and fractional scaling – you can only scale out to 75%,50%,25%, 12.5%… or in to 125%,150%,200% and so on. The triangle at the top-right of the Navigator accesses the options for the panel.There are only two in Photoshop 7: Dock To Palette Well and Options.The latter lets you change the colour of the zoom box, which can be handy if you have a very red image like ours and the box is hard to see, of if you just don’t like working with the red colour. 4 To zoom in and out using the Navigator you have a few different options.You can use the zoom slider to interactively zoom the image, and that’s quite fun to do. Or you can click on the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons either side of the slider. Or you can click in the text field to enter an exact scale. 3 The Navigator panel is very useful when zoomed in very close to an image, because it shows you with a red box exactly where in the main image the zoomed in portion is located. Note that you can make the preview larger by dragging the lower right corner of the palette to resize it, even to fill the whole screen. 2 From the Windows menu you can access the Navigator panel, though it’s open by default in Photoshop.This is a handy tool because it enables you to view the entire image in a small window, pan the main view, and zoom in and out, all from the same small area on screen. It’s great for those that don’t like to use keyboard shortcuts. 1
  • 26. The main interface in Photoshop is quite simple and well laid- out, but it has been constantly refined through development to offer highly efficient document and view management. Within the main menu is the View menu which has many view management options – the Zoom In and Out commands and their respective shortcuts, as well as commands to show the Rulers, Guides and Grids and the option to enable various kinds of snapping. As well as using the Navigator or Zoom tool you can use the shortcuts [Ctrl]+[+] and [Ctrl]+[–] to zoom in and out (Mac users replace [Ctrl] with [Command]). View management Photoshop has several gadgets to help you work with various views of your document 26 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 2 Multiple documents can be arranged on the screen using Tile,in Windows > Documents.This fits your images next to each other on screen Floating away The floating palettes can get in that way, especially if you are working on a small monitor.No matter,at any time you can hit the [F] key to toggle the display mode to full screen.Use the Tab key to toggle the palettes on and off to get a totally uncluttered view. When the Zoom tool is active the Options bar displays a few extra buttons – Actual Pixels,Fit On Screens and Print Size.These zoom the view to specific sizes. The Navigator panel is grouped with the Info palette.Use the navigator to perform multiple view navigation tasks in one area, with one hand.You also get a handy image preview. The Print Size pop-up is located at the bottom of the document window.Click on the blank space here to preview how large the image will print out on the paper size set in the Print dialog. Yet another way to zoom the document is to type in a value here at the bottom-left of the document window. The Zoom and Pan tools can be found at the bottom of the toolbar.Click on these to zoom and pan inside the image. At the bottom of the toolbar are buttons to control full screen view.The middle one makes the current window fill the screen,the right makes the menu bar disappear and the left returns it to normal. ZOOMING AROUND
  • 27. As well as moving and copying pixels, Photoshop’s Move tool allows you to align and distribute objects evenly across the document or within a selection. With the Move tool selected you will see a number of options available. The first option, Auto Select Layer, is very handy. It enables you to click on a pixel in the image to select that layer. The next, Show Bounding Box, displays a transform box around the selection or element or layer. You can drag the handles on the edge of the box to move the selection. If you click on the lines, you’ll switch to the Free Transform mode, enabling you to scale, rotate and deform the objects. The next section of options only becomes active when you have linked layers. To link layers so that you can move them as one object, go to the Layers palette and click the blank icon box between the eye icon and one of your layers. A chain icon now appears in the blank icon box, indicating that the layer you have just clicked next to is now linked to the currently selected layer. Move,Align and Distribute The latest version of Photoshop has handy Align and Distribute features 27ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Navigation and manipulation Line them up The Align features work with selections on fully filled layers too.If a selection is active then it is used as a master guide for all the layers to be aligned to.If you have accidentally moved image layers so that they lie partially off the canvas you can use the Align feature to make them all line up again squarely on the canvas. When you select a layer that has other layers linked to it the Align and Distribute options of the Move tool become active. Click on these to distribute the layers or align them to various key points.You can use the Align Left Edges button, for example, to align individual text layers so that their left edges line up. It’s important to note that these options only take into account the bounding box of the layer. If you have a series of layers linked together but they are filled totally with pixels, then the align options will have no effect.This is because the layers have nowhere to be aligned to, as they are already lined up on the canvas. ACTIVATING ALIGN AND DISTRIBUTE Feel like going MAD? Here’s how to Move,Align and Distribute The Align and Distribute buttons in the Move options bar can be used to align multiple linked layers
  • 28. The Move tool The Move tool is a very handy,multi-purpose gadget – and surprisingly easy to use 28 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 2 On the Move Atanytime,nomatter whattoolisselected, youcan accessthe Movetoolbypressing [V]onyourkeyboard. Scissor action The Move tool cursor displays a pair of scissors next to it when it is over an active selection. If a selection is active then the Move tool will move the pixels in the selection only, as opposed to the whole layer. Here we’ve selected the whole object in a flattened document and dragged it.The result is that the pixels are lifted and moved, leaving a hole behind. 4 You can scroll your mouse through the list to select precisely the right layer you want to move without having to go to the Layers palette. Here we’ve selected the Wireframe layer, and moved it. Getting into the habit of naming your layers will help here. 3 The neat thing about the Move tool is that it has a built-in layer navigation feature. In a multi-layer document you can find out exactly which layers are beneath any given point in an image by control-clicking and holding on the image. A menu will pop up displaying the names of the layers in order, from the top downwards. 2 The Move tool is the second tool at the top of the toolbar. It looks like an arrow but without the tail. Use this tool when you want to move elements in a document, be they selected pixels or whole layers. 1
  • 29. 29ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Navigation and manipulation Extrude and move In the 3D text example on the left,we first created a text layer, then loaded it as a selection by command clicking the layer.In a new layer below the text layer we created a gradient through the selection,and with it still active we carried out an extrude- move function. Computer Arts To discover even more ways to develop your Photoshop skills, check out our sister magazine, Computer Arts. You can find the magazine’s website at www.computerarts.co.uk. A nifty trick is to hold down the [Alt] key and use the arrow keys to nudge the selection diagonally. Used on a text outline filled with a gradient like this, repeatedly pressing the Up and Right Arrow keys creates an extruded 3D object. 8 Another way to do this is to create a new layer from the selection first, then use the Move tool as normal.With a selection active press [Ctrl] + [J] (that’s [Command] + [J] on a Mac) to convert the selection to a new layer, then move it as normal. 7 Now as you drag the selection will be copied, lifted and moved to another location on the layer. Note that while the selection is still active the copied pixels occupy a quasi-layer.This is said to be ‘floating’selection.You can move it around as if it was on its own layer. Only when you deselect the pixels will it be dropped on to the layer. 6 Moving pixels and leaving a hole behind may be fine in some circumstances but if you want to copy the pixels instead of cutting them out then you have to hold down the [Alt] key (often called the‘Option’key on a Mac, although it’s still labelled‘Alt’) as you drag with the Move tool. Notice that the cursor will change to a double arrow, indicating you’re now in Copy mode. 5
  • 30. Direct and Path Selection tools Use the Path Selection and Direct Selection tools to move and edit paths and vector shapes 30 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 2 A familiar Path The Path Selection tool is much like the old arrow cursor in the Pen tool group of previous versions of Photoshop,before vector shapes and masks were introduced. Hide and seek You can show and hide the path outlines by typing [Ctrl]+[Shift]+[H],on your keyboard (that’s [Command] +[Shift]+[H] for Mac users) or toggling the Views > Show > Target Pathsmenu command on and off. With both paths selected you can click on the Combine button in the Path Selection’s Option bar to merge both (or as many as you like) into a single path. If you click away from the paths to deselect them, then reselect them, you’ll see that all the paths are now selected because they are one. 4 Much like other selections in Photoshop you can add to them using the [Shift] key. Here we have selected both paths by [Shift]-clicking on the second path to activate it. Both can now be transformed together. However, to make this work you must have the Show Bounding Box option turned off. 3 For this we need to activate the Path Selection tool.This is in the eighth row of the toolbar and looks like a black arrow cursor.With this selected, clicking on the edges of each path in the vector mask selects it.We are able to move the path and transform it to fit by making the bounding box visible and clicking on the edge of the box to activate Free Transform. 2 Here we have two vector shapes in a single vector mask applied to a Solid Colour layer.They are not properly aligned and we need to select them independently, but how? The Move tool only lets us move the whole layer, so we’re not able to select the paths independently. 1
  • 31. Vectorshapesandmultiplepaths Follow our step-by-step guide to working on vector shapes and multiple paths 31ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Navigation and manipulation Take the A road The [A] key is the shortcut to the Path Selection tool group. To toggle between Path and Direct Selection mode type [Shift]+[A]. Make a point Clicking once on a point that already has handles with the Cusp cursor converts it to a sharp point with no handles. With the Direct Selection tool you can select a point in order to access its Bezier handles and modify the shape of the curve. If a point has no handles you can pull them out by holding down [Ctrl]+[Alt] as you drag ([Command]+[Alt] on a Mac).The tool changes to an inverted‘V’,called the Cusp tool. 4 With either the Direct Selection or Path Selection tools active you can duplicate a path,or multiple paths by [Option]+dragging them.The cursor will change to display a plus sign next to it when you hold the Option key down as a visual cue that you are about to make a copy. 3 If you need to select multiple points on a path and move them as one you can drag out a marquee with the Direct Selection tool. Alternatively the usual‘shift to add’ maxim holds true: [Shift]+click to add points to the selection that are difficult to select within a single marquee. 2 If you want to edit the points of a vector shape mask then you need to change from the Path Selection to the Direct Selection tool.With this tool active, you are able to click to select individual points in a path or vector shape. 1
  • 32. Chapter 3 USING THE BRUSHES AND PENCIL TOOLS Photoshop is traditionally known for image manipulation, retouching, effects and colour correction, but not so much as a painter’s tool. This has partly been due to the fact that the artistic capabilities of the program were severely limited due to the poor support for artistic media simulation. Other programs such as Corel Painter used to lead the market here, but the last few versions of Photoshop has seen it’s Brushes system completely overhauled, making it much more useful as an artistic media program. Having said that, Brushes have always been essential for just about In this chapter… Using the Brush and Pencil tools Editing and saving brush properties Creating custom brush tips Using the History and Art History brush This chapter introduces you to Photoshop’s more arty tools,the Brushes.However,as we’ll see,you can use these versatile tools for far more than just painting everything else in Photoshop, and getting the most out of the Brush tools involves finding out all the little secrets and features buried inside the program. Actually they’re not that secret but its surprising how few of the shortcuts some Photoshop users know. It’s usually those who have been using it since the early days that know all the best tips. Spoilt for choice In a way, the later, feature-rich versions spoil you by giving you so many options to work with. The History palette, introduced in version 5, is a fantastic time-saving device. It’s also an incredible feature
  • 33. that takes the basic Photoshop functions and multiplies their capabilities tenfold. The History palette essentially adds a kind of non-linear undo to the program. Previously undo was limited to just hopping back step-by-step. The History palette displays all your operations (up to a maximum number that you specify) in a list, complete with the tool used and its icon. By clicking on any of these steps you can immediately jump straight back to the document as it was at that point in time. Even more impressive is the ability to store permanent snapshots of the state of the document at any time. These will not ‘fall off the back’ like items in the undo list would when the list exceeded the number of steps set in the Preferences. However all this power and flexibility comes at a cost: disk space. The History states can consume very large amounts of ‘scratch disk’ space, the random storage bin that Photoshop uses as a kind of virtual memory. Performance figures Keep a large amount of hard disk space free for Photoshop – as much as 2 to 4GB if working on large images. Ideally, partition your disk and dedicate one part to Photoshop. 33ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Brushes and Pencil tools Page 41 Dual Brushes offer the user unprecedented levels of detail Page 45The Art History Brush allows you to turn an image into a painting Page 34 Photoshop’s brush editing system gets the most from Brush tools Page 35 Access Photoshop’s hidden extras for more versatility Page 36 Learn about the importance of Spacing,Flow and Opacity for brushes Page 43The History Brush offers superb photo manipulation options
  • 34. The Brush tool can be found in the fourth row of Photoshop’s toolbar. When selected, the options bar displays quite a few settings for the current Brush such as Opacity, Flow and whether it is in Airbrush mode or not. There are also pull- down menus for the Apply mode, Brush Shape preset and the new Brush Editing palette. Brushes are used to apply coloured pixels to an image. They take their colour from the current Foreground Colour swatch. The Colour palette can be used to choose colours in a number of different ways – by using the small gradient strip at the base, the sliders or the Swatch tab. The Brush tool Brushes offer some of Photoshop’s most flexible features.So where can you find them? 34 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 3 The Color palette lets you choose colours in various ways – via a gradient strip,sliders or swatches,which are located in their own tab Back and forth You can set two colours,a foreground and background colour,and switch between them while painting with the Brush tool by pressing the [X] key. The Brush presets are located here at the top-left of the Options palette when the Brush tool is selected. The Brushes palette can be accessed by clicking this icon in the Brush tool’s Option bar. The basic Brush settings, such as Size,Shape and Angle as well as the spacing control can be accessed by clicking the Brush Tip Shape section at the top,the controls of which display at the bottom of the palette. The Brushes palette is very versatile but can seem a bit complicated at first.It’s far more advanced than in previous versions. Choose the display option for the presets from the preset menu.You can display the presets as a list or as icons if you prefer. The panel can be expanded by dragging the bottom-right corner. THE BRUSH INTERFACE AND CONTROLS
  • 35. Using Brushes There is a huge range of customisable and preset brushes.Here’s how to use them 35ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Brushes and Pencil tools The key to opacity You can also reduce opacity using the numeric key pad. Pressing the 0 key sets the opacity to 100%, while pressing the [5] key sets the opacity to 50%.Pressing the [1] numeric key sets the opacity to 10% and so on. Nimble numeracy To get an intermediate opacity value like 15%, type 1 followed quickly by 5 on the numeric keypad. In this case the paint‘builds’, accumulating opacity the more and more you paint.This is very useful for building up tones and colours in an image gradually. You can see the effect clearly here.Where the strokes double back and cross each other the colour intensifies.The downside is that the individual‘dabs’are also visible. 4 Flow is like opacity but is a dynamic property.Whereas opacity sets a value for the maximum amount of opacity, Flow sets the minimum amount.With the Flow setting very low, say 10%, and opacity set to full, you can paint with what seems like a low opacity, except when you paint over the strokes you have just applied. 3 The Opacity of the brush defines how transparent the paint is – that is, how much of the colour underneath shows through the paint. By default it is set to 100%, but you can reduce this using the Opacity slider in the Options bar. 2 Once you select the Brush tool you can choose a Brush Shape from the Brush preset drop-down menu in the Options bar. Each preset is saved at a given size, indicated below the brush preview icon in the preset list.You can alter this by dragging the master diameter slider. 1
  • 36. Using Brushes continued 36 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 3 Brush size shortcut You can change the brush size up and down in 10 point increments using the square bracket keys [ and ]. More shortcuts On this month’s CD you’ll find PDF files that contain all the possible keyboard shortcuts for both PCs and Apple Macs.. You can also turn Spacing off using the check-box in the Brushes palette. When it’s off, Photoshop applies spacing depending on how quickly you draw your stroke.This can be good or bad, depending what you want the stroke to look like. 8 In order to counteract this effect, you need to use an even lower Flow setting. Here the flow has been reduced to 3% for a 5% spacing value.You can see that the strokes appear much smoother and build nicely as we apply more paint. 7 By reducing the Spacing you can get better results when using a low Flow setting. Here the Spacing is reduced to 5%, which means each dab overlaps by 95% of its diameter.This results in a much smoother stroke, but its also more opaque, as the brush tends to‘self build’. 6 This brings us on to the Brushes palette, which is opened by clicking the icon at the top-right of the Options bar.The palette contains a setting called Spacing.This controls how frequently Photoshop places a‘dab’of paint as you drag the brush.The default setting of 25% makes each dab overlap the next by three quarters of its diameter. Here’s the result from a low Flow setting. 5
  • 37. 37ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Brushes and Pencil tools Brush shortcuts Lots of Photoshop’s tools use the same brushes interface.You can use the same shortcuts to change brush size and pop up the preset panel with any of them.Take a look at the PDF files included on the CD for a full list of shortcuts for both PC and Mac. Straight ahead To paint perfectly straight lines click once to place the star point of the stroke then shift-click elsewhere.A straight stroke will joint the two points. Also, while painting you can choose a new colour from the image by holding down the [Alt] key.The Brush tool changes to the Eye Dropper, allowing you to sample a colour from any pixel. 12 When painting an image using brushes it can be a chore moving to the Options bar to change brush size and shape. However the preset pop-up is available right beneath your mouse if you right-click in your image. Mac users should hold down [Ctrl] and click for the same effect. 11 Soft brushes are very useful especially when used with other tools such as the Rubber Stamp, which uses the same brush interface as the Brush tool. A Hardness of 100% is not totally hard, however.There is still some edge smoothing because of the effect of‘anti-aliasing’(on the right stroke). If you want a totally hard brush (left stroke) switch to the Pencil tool. 10 Other brush properties include Hardness.This defines how sharp the edges of the brush are and can be varied from 0 to 100% in the Brushes panel.The brush on the left has a hardness of 100% while the one on the right has a Hardness of 0%.They are exactly the same diameter, but notice that the soft brush seems smaller because its edges are less opaque. 9
  • 38. The Brushes palette is where it all happens. It’s Photoshop’s answer to its previous lack of natural media tools. In truth, it’s not really a natural media simulation system, but rather an extension of the brush dynamics features that previous versions of the program already had. When you open the Brushes palette you are faced with an overwhelming array of controls and they do take a while to become familiar with. Most of the controls are to do with the ‘dynamics’ of the brushes – how the brush properties vary during use. Photoshop allows you to set the various properties, such as scattering, colour and hue variation. These can stay fixed, respond to cursor speed or fade over a pre-defined distance. This gives you a large additional range of natural, organic variances to your brush strokes which would not otherwise be possible with a mouse. However, to get the most from the brush dynamics, and experience their intuitive ‘feel’, you should really invest in a graphics tablet and pen, such as the Wacom Intuos. Exploring the Brushes palette The basics of the Brushes palette and presets and how they affect the look of your strokes 38 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 3 Take a tablet With a graphics tablet attached,the brush parameters can respond to pen pressure,speed and tilt (if supported).The result is that you can create brushes that are responsive to your touch and work more like real artists tools. But you can also set up the dynamics so that the brushes perform in a totally unnatural way too,if you wish. Brush shape is the final part of the jigsaw when creating and editing brushes.The standard brushes offer a circular shape that can be hard or soft, round or oval and rotated at any angle. But there are a number of special brushes that are more graphic in nature.These can be selected from the Preset menu and there are many more that come with Photoshop but are not loaded by default.To load a preset library choose one from the Brush preset panel menu (the triangle at the top-right).You are then asked to Replace or Append the current list. Append adds the selected library to the current list of brushes, rather than replacing it. CHOOSING YOUR BRUSH SHAPE Having the right brush shape for the task is the key to success The preset brush libraries have many different brush shapes.The menu is at the top-right of the preset brush pop-up
  • 39. There are 13 sections in the Brushes palette, displayed in a list down the left-hand side. The first of these is the Presets section – essentially a duplicate of the Preset pull-down menu in the Option bar. You can choose a brush preset from the list, or load new ones from the pop-up menu at the top-right of the palette. At the bottom is a preview of how the current brush stroke would behave, and above that is the Master Diameter slider. At the very bottom are the New Brush and Delete buttons. Clicking the New Brush button creates a new preset, which you can name and save to reuse another time. The Brushes palette in detail Having seen the Brush palette’s potential,let’s delve deeper into the Brush Preset features 39ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Brushes and Pencil tools The Brush Presets section at the very top stores complete brush settings,including the type of tip shape and the dynamics settings Saving your presets You can save the currently loaded set of presets as a library using the Save Brushes command in the pop- up menu at the top-right corner of the palette.The library is saved as a .abr file, which only Photoshop can read. Size Jitter – Controls the variation in size of the dabs in a stroke.The higher the value, the greater the variation. Minimum – Sets the smallest size the brush will reach when it is jittered. Control – These menus define what dynamics attribute controls the parameter.Fade reduces the effect of the parameter over a certain distance,entered in the numeric field.Other options are Off,Pen Tilt,Pen Pressure and Stylus Wheel. Minimum Roundness – Sets the minimum value that is reached when randomly jittering the Roundness. Tilt Scale – Enabled when the Pen Tilt option is selected in the Control pop-up. Adjusts the tilting sensitivity. Angle Jitter – If the brush is asymmetrical you can jitter the angle of the dabs,but not on a perfectly round brush. Roundness jitter – This tool randomly alters the amount a brush is squashed or ‘rounded’on one axis. THE TOOLS OF BRUSH DYNAMICS
  • 40. Scattering Scattering is a great way of adding random brush strokes to images.Here’s how it works 40 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 3 Better late than never Brushes in later versions of Photoshop have more options to control their behaviour. If you’re using an older version you may find that some of the features that we’ve mentioned do not apply. Scatter effects Wide Scatter settings can be used to create random but even variation in tone or colour on your artwork.Use it with selections to control the placement of the effect. Count Jitter simply varies the number in the Count setting per dab, and is not very noticeable in most situations. Note that there are Control pop-ups in the Scatter section so you can link the parameters to graphics pen tilt, pressure and scroll wheel, or fake the effect of distance. 4 The Count slider multiplies each dab by the number shown. instead of a single dab, a setting of 5 in the Count slider will produce five times as many dabs, each of which may be scattered. Because it increases the density of the brush dabs you may want to lower the Flow setting of the brush. 3 When the Both Axes option is enabled the scattering takes place perpendicular to the stroke and along it. Most of the time you’d leave this option off, unless you want a very randomized stroke, almost like a spray. 2 The Scattering section is great fun.This adds a random scattering of the dabs and is a great way to add random, organic strokes to images.The Scatter slider controls the amount of scattering perpendicular to the stroke direction. 1
  • 41. Textures and Dual Brushes Achieve seriously complex brush effects with additional features of the Brushes palette 41ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Brushes and Pencil tools Precise strokes Don’t forget gradient selections are a great way to control where ‘paint’will go on an image.You can blend or fade away your strokes very precisely using these gradients. Go easy Dual brushes are the key to getting more detailed brush strokes in less time.They are more suited,however,to be used sparsely rather than as dense strokes. Enabling Scattering is a good idea. Enabling all of the numerous other settings and it becomes like playing with wet paint, and great fun. It only takes seconds to spray the canvas with incredibly detailed patterns and colours, and work them together like real paint. 4 Colour Dynamics takes the concept of scattering and jitter but applies it to the colour properties of a brush.You can achieve very complex and detailed strokes using the settings in this section. 3 Enabling the Dual Brush option makes things really interesting.This feature adds a second brush tip to texture the main one. It has its own Spacing, Size, Scattering and Count settings and is mixed in using an Apply mode chosen from the pop-up menu at the top of the panel. 2 The rest of the parameters are operated in much the same way as the Scattering section that we looked at in detail.The best thing to do is to experiment with the settings by playing around with them. Here the Texture section is enabled.This lets you add texture to the brush tip using one of Photoshop’s preset textures. 1
  • 42. The History Brush seems a bit of a mysterious tool in the Photoshop toolbox for both newcomer and veteran alike, and for that reason is one that often gets overlooked. This is usually because veteran Photoshoppers have got used to the way Photoshop used to work before the advent of the History Brush and old habits die hard. But it’s worth getting to know this unusual tool because, together with its indispensable partner the History palette, it should turn out to be a total delight to any newcomer. Every time you perform an action, such as painting a stroke, applying a filter, or deleting a layer, that step is stored in the History palette as a ‘state’. By clicking on any of these, you can return your document to the state it was in at that point. Now, here’s the best bit – by clicking on the small icon box next to a history state in the History palette, you earmark that layer as the source for the History Brush. When you then paint on the image with the History Brush only those pixels will be returned back to the earmarked state. The History Brush Discover Photoshop’s secret weapon for retouching and photo manipulation 42 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 3 Step back in History The History Brush lets you paint previous states of the current document over the current state.This makes it a powerful tool for selectively applying filters to an image. Photoshop 5 onwards has two kinds of undo.There’s the normal [Ctrl]+[Z] undo ([Command]+[Z] on a Mac), which undoes and redoes the last action you performed.This can be handy to flip back and forth, checking the result of your last action.There is also History.You can step backwards in History using [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Z] (that’s [Command]+[Alt]+[Z] for Mac users). By repeatedly pressing this shortcut, you step back further and further through the history.To go forwards again press [Ctrl/Command]+[Shift]+[Z]. Set the number of states stored in History by going to Preferences > General and entering a new number in the History States field. HISTORY AND UNDO So what’s the difference between Undo and History? You can set Photoshop’s maximum number of History states from the General section in Preferences
  • 43. Using the History Brush The History Brush is a powerful and flexible tool,but has all the simplicity of a normal brush 43ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Brushes and Pencil tools Size does matter To paint with History states the source state must be the same size as the current document.if you resized an image you will not be able to use any states prior to that as a source for the History Brush. United states In order to paint with History states,the source state must also be the same colour space.If you changed this you will not be able to use any states prior to that point as a source for the History Brush. Now we can change the History source to the Inverted state, select the History tool and a fancy brush and paint.Wherever we paint the pixels in the image will be inverted. Obviously you can use this technique with any effect, filter or adjustment you like. 4 We want to get the image back as is was so that we can selectively invert it, but undoing the last step also clears the state from the History, which is no good. Instead we mark the uninverted state as a History source. Choose Edit > Fill and set the Fill mode to History, et voilá, back to normal but with History intact. 3 Typing [Ctrl/Command]+[I] inverts the image, turning the shades and colours to their opposites.This will be be the basis for the effect we want to achieve using the History Brush, and it has been saved as a state in the History palette. 2 A good use of the History Brush is to apply an effect to an image in localised areas without the need to construct a mask or selection first. Here’s our starting image to which we want to apply some special effects. First of all we resized it to make it a bit smaller. 1
  • 44. Using the History Brush continued 44 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 3 Filter tip You can use this same technique of Brushing using History to selectively apply any filter to an image. Early edits In earlier versions of Photoshop you could open part of a large image and edit it, placing the edited part back into the large image once finished.That was in the days when RAM was expensive. Now we select the Gaussian Blur state as the source for the History Brush and paint in the image precisely where we want it to be blurred, leaving the unblurred pixels intact to create a forced‘depth of focus’effect. 8 Now we return the image to its original state by selecting the unblurred state as the History source then using the Edit > Fill command set to History mode. 7 So, we follow the same steps as before except this time we blur the whole image by Applying the Gaussian Blur filter instead of inverting it. 6 Here’s another example of the same technique.We’ll use History to fake a ‘depth of field’blur effect on this 3D image. Normally you might do this using a depth render as a mask, but what if you forgot to save one? 5
  • 45. Art History Brush The History Brush has an even more creative cousin – meet the Art History Brush 45ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Brushes and Pencil tools Historic detail Even if the detail has been obliterated,you can bring it back by using a smaller brush, because the original, untouched image is used as the source. Pick a mode The Art History Brush can be applied in different blending modes: Darken, Lighten,Hue,Colour, Saturation and Luminosity. You can carry on adding details back, changing brushes and styles until you get the result you want. Here we went back and lightened the original image then used this as the source, enabling us to add in some detail in the darker part of the face. 4 That blocks out the image nicely. Now we can paint some of the finer details back in. Changing the brush to a much smaller radius lets you add back some details, but you can do this only to certain areas.We’ve used a 3-pixel brush, and the Loose Medium Style from the History Brush’s Options bar. 3 Here’s how it works. Open any photo, preferably one that will work well as a painting.You don’t need to perform any action to set things up, just select the current state as the History Source and select the Art History Brush.We used the Impressionist preset from the pop-up menu at the very top-left of the Options bar and painted over the image. 2 The Art History Brush is one of those bizarre but fun features Adobe comes up with once in a while. Basically, it is used to convert any image into one that looks hand- painted.The original photo is on the left, and the Art History conversion on the right. 1
  • 46. Chapter 4 USING THE CLONING AND HEALING TOOLS Cloning is a very simple and obvious concept in image manipulation. Take pixels from over here and duplicate them over there. That’s really all there is to it. The Clone tool, also known as the Rubber Stamp, is Photoshop’s implementation of this technique and offers you a great deal of power for retouching images. The tool works by ‘sampling’ pixels at one location in an image, or even in a different document altogether, and painting them in a different location using what is essentially a brush. The Clone tool offers most of the properties of the normal Brush tool – size, hardness, In this chapter… Learn how to wield the Clone tool (Rubber Stamp) like a pro Using blending modes to get better results when cloning difficult textures like skin Learn how to clone pixels between documents Working with the Healing and Patch tools to improve portraits and photos Perform special effects and image manipulation tricks using Cloning The Cloning and Healing tools in Photoshop offer an elegant way to fix damaged photos, correct bad scans and generally clean up your images.They’re great fun to use too tip shapes, dynamics and blending modes, but applies these to cloning. In addition to these the Clone tool lets you clone not only pixels from a single layer but from the whole of a multi-layered document. This can be a very powerful feature for advanced users but can cause problems if you don’t keep your wits about you. Seamless sampling When sampling pixels from a multi- layered, composite image you must be aware of any Adjustment layers present. If you sample a composite image with say, a Hue/Saturation Adjustment layer applied to it, boosting the saturation, cloning on
  • 47. to layers below this adjustment layer will result in the cloned pixels being boosted twice. If your intention is to have a seamless result, your hopes will be dashed, so it always pays to be aware of this. In version 7 of Photoshop, Adobe introduced a tool that takes the concept of cloning to the next level in terms of ease of use, known as the Healing tool. Cloning is a great tool to have but as we saw earlier, it can take some effort to get a seamless result, especially when the sample point pickings are slim and when dealing with multi-layered images. It can take quite a bit of practice to achieve smooth results. Healing, however, lets you clone pixels over a problem area but rather than simply overlaying them, as the Clone tool does, it blends them with those they are replacing, using some clever algorithms. Skin care As you may have guessed, the upshot of such technology is that you don’t need to be nearly so careful in your cloning – when blending the blemishes on the face of a subject in a portrait, for example. The Healing tool will intelligently blend the pixels to get the best result (at least most of the time), which works well on skin. 47ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Cloning and Healing tools Page 52The new Healing tool can make someone look years younger Page 51 Revive damaged photos and images with cloning techniques Page 53The Healing Patch tool is a great way to fix up photos Page 48 Cloning copies parts of your image and transplants them elsewhere Page 49The Clone tool can remove unwanted parts of an image Page 50 Less-than-perfect portraits can be fixed up in seconds
  • 48. The Rubber Stamp (Clone) tool The Rubber Stamp tool is useful for copying pixels from one part of an image to another 48 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 4 Sample mode When you hold the [Alt] key down the Clone cursor changes from the brush outline to crosshairs to show that it’s in sample mode and allowing more precise sampling. Precision painting Use the Caps Lock key on any brush tool to activate Precise Cursor mode. Now we can clone the boy. Releasing the [Option] key returns to normal cloning mode.We can clone over the face of the boy at the top-right, replacing his with the face of the boy from the lower-left.We can carry on and make as many clones as we like. 4 Selecting a 20-pixel soft brush we first set the Sample point from which to clone.To do this we hold down the [Alt] key and click where we want to sample from – in this case the face of the boy in the lower-right of the photo. 3 To ensure that we can easily return to the original if necessary, we first make a copy of the image as a new layer. Selecting the Clone tool we can see the Options bar looks much like the Brush tool’s. At the far right are two extra options though: Aligned and Use All Layers.Turn off the Aligned check-box. 2 Let’s focus on the more creative and fun aspects. Here’s a great example of what cloning is all about – our source image is a typical group portrait. 1
  • 49. Removing unwanted elements Cloning is ideal when you need to seamlessly eradicate an unwanted part of an image 49ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Cloning and Healing tools In the right measure Use the Measure tool to drag along the top edge of one of the bench slats to read its angle,then use the Edit >Transform > Rotate command.The angle that you just found will automatically be entered in the rotation field. Online tutorials You’ll find a host of handy tutorials to help you take your Photoshop skills further at the website of our sister magazine, Computer Arts. www.computerarts.co.uk With a bit of effort we can remove the man entirely from the image. Note that to do this successfully we need to stop when the alignment of the image begins to drift, and take a new sample point. 4 It sort of works but the cloned part of the bench does not line up properly with the original.To fix this we can undo the cloning, rotate the image slightly so that the slats are horizontal, and clone again.This time they line up. 3 This time we make sure the Aligned option is enabled.This allows us to use multiple strokes, and to maintain the offset so that the cloning is consistent. In a duplicate layer we set the sample point on to the middle of the park bench and begin cloning out the man on the left. 2 Another great use for cloning is for removing objects from a picture. Here’s an example image. Perhaps you wanted to use the image with some text overlaid on one side, or you just need to change the composition. 1
  • 50. One of the most common uses of the Clone tool is to fix blemishes, bruises and marks on skin. If you want to fix marks on the skin such as a rash or the occasional spot you can easily clone it out using the Clone tool as normal. While you’ll remove the blemish you’ll probably find it very difficult to get a seamless clone. What tends to happen is that the clone will be slightly the wrong shade or colour, so that when you zoom out to inspect the whole image, the cloned point is almost as visible as the original blemish, which defeats the whole point of removing the blemish in the first place! Cloning Skin You can fix problem portraits in seconds using the Clone tool and its subtle blending mode 50 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 4 Fixing skin in photos is easy,once you know that the secret is simply to change the Clone tool’s blending mode and subtly clone out the marks A cloning alternative An alternative technique,which uses the same principal,is to clone on to a new layer using the Normal mode but set the layer’s blending mode to Colour or Luminosity. Less is more Using a low opacity allows you to clone away blemishes gradually. You don’t always need to eradicate blemishes totally.In fact,doing so can look too fake.Instead just reduce their intensity a little. CLONING SKIN correctly requires careful use of the brush blending modes. In the Options bar set the blending mode in the drop-down menu to Luminosity and the opacity to 50%.You can then clone the image using only the brightness of the sampled point.This lets you get rid of light or dark blemishes easily, without changing the colour. IF THE blemish is a red patch of skin or bruise, set the blending mode to Colour before you clone.That way the brightness of the pixels remains the same, but the off-colour will be removed. MAKING USE of both apply modes in turn is likely to be the best option for very bad marks like cuts and bruises.This allows you to deal with the colour and brightness independently. WITH BOTH methods try to keep the sample point as close as you can to the problem area to minimize the difference in skin tone. THE TRICKS FOR SKIN CLONING REVEALED
  • 51. The Healing Brush No time to fuss with the Clone tool? Then fix up an image with the Healing Brush instead 51ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Cloning and Healing tools Extreme healing The same technique of setting the blending mode to either Colour or Luminosity instead of Normal works with the Healing tool just as well as the Clone tool,but you’ll only need it for extreme situations when the built-in blending algorithm doesn’t quite cut it. Sample and Pattern The Healing tool works in two modes: Sample and Pattern. In Sample mode it works like the Clone tool,while in Pattern mode it blends the pixels with one of Photoshop’s stored patterns.The uses for this mode are less obvious,but useful for certain effects. The Healing brush has different blending modes which you can choose from the Options bar drop-down menu, 90% of the time you won’t need to use them. 4 Using the Healing brush instead results in a totally invisible repair.There’s no need to change blending modes or opacity, just set the sample point using the [Alt] key then click and drag over the damage. 3 Using the Clone tool works, but leaves a very slight, but noticeable mark behind due to the sampled pixels being a sightly different shade.We could use more advanced techniques, but why bother when the Healing brush is at hand? 2 The Healing Brush can be found in the fourth row on the toolbar, and looks like a plaster. It uses the same sampling principal as the Clone tool but works by blending the original and cloned pixels together to create a near-perfect fix. Here’s an image that needs a bit of a repair. 1
  • 52. The Healing Patch tool If you don’t like using brushes and selections are more your thing,try the Patch tool 52 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 4 No smear TheHealingandPatch toolscansmearifthey areneartoverydark pixels.Useaselectionto protecttheareayou wanttofixif smearingoccurs. When you release the mouse button, the pixels will become merged with those below. Photoshop performs its trick intelligently, so the dark area vanishes but the skin tone looks normal.We can repeat this on the other eye to complete the anti- ageing process. 4 Because Destination mode is enabled we can drag these selected pixels onto the destination pixels. As you drag a copy of the pixels, the selected area moves with the mouse as a visual cue – you are actually cloning the pixels. 3 With the Patch tool selected we lasso an area of clean skin texture, just below the eye we want to fix.That area is highlighted with the familiar marching ants. 2 The Patch tool can be found in the same tool group as the Healing Brush, but it has fewer options.The most logical mode to use is Destination, so this is how we have it set for now.We want to make the man in this photo look a bit younger by removing the bags under his eyes. 1
  • 53. 53ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Cloning and Healing tools Large patches The Patch tool can be useful when attempting to repair very large areas in one go.It’s much quicker than using the Healing Brush too. Select then Patch If you need to,you can make the selection before you choose the Patch tool.This means that you can use any of Photoshop’s advanced selections tools,such as Quick Mask,Colour Range or the Magic Wand to preselect the area you require more precisely. When you are happy with the selected area you release the mouse.The selection snaps back to its original location taking the source pixels with it.When Photoshop blends the two, the line vanishes. Here’s the result on both eyes. 4 Now all you need to do is to drag the selection over the pixels you want to use to fix the problem area.This time only the selection outline moves, not the pixels that are selected, as is the case in Destination mode. 3 When in Source mode you need to select the pixel that you want to change first, as opposed to selecting the pixel you want to use to fix the problem area. Here we drag around the line under the left eye using the Patch tool to select it. 2 The Healing Patch tool works the opposite way round when in Source mode. Depending on your way of thinking, Source mode may seem less intuitive.We will perform the same trick of removing lines under the eyes in this image but use Source mode instead. 1
  • 54. Chapter 5 THE GRADIENT, FILL AND ERASER TOOLS Gradients and Fills are such simple tools in Photoshop that their simplicity can often hide their power, especially in the hands of an experienced Photoshop user. A Fill is simply a way to pour a single flat colour, pattern or history state into a selected area, or the whole canvas. Like most of the tools in Photoshop, there is more than one way in which to accomplish a Fill; we’ll explore some of these different techniques later on in this chapter. Gradual benefits The Gradient options are even more powerful than Fills. With the Gradient tool you can create a fill In this chapter… Learn to use and control Gradients Create Custom Gradients, using the gradient editing features in Photoshop 7 Use the Paint Bucket tool to fill areas with a colour, pattern or history Use Gradients and Fills for special effects and image manipulation Remove a subject from its background using the Background and Magic Eraser tools Once you get more competent with Photoshop you’ll appreciate the importance of these utility tools.The Gradient tool in particular is essential for all manner of tricks and effects that gradually changes colour. Gradients come in all kinds of different shapes: Linear, Radial, Angular, Reflected and Diamond, and this makes them very useful for a variety of different situations. The Gradient Editing feature in Photoshop enables you to create gradients with two or more colours. You can have a simple white-to- black gradient, or a whole rainbow of colours. For special effects work the simple black and white gradient is absolutely indispensable, putting a whole range of additional options at your disposal. For example, if you want an effect to smoothly fade from full strength to invisible then
  • 55. it’s easy to use a white-to-black gradient to control this, usually as a layer mask. Photo perfection For photographers, coloured gradients can play the role of custom filters, making it easy to create sultry sunsets or brooding, stormy skies at the drag of a mouse. If you combine gradients with alpha channels you have the power user’s playground. The ability to construct complex masks and selections using alpha channels and the Gradient tool is unparalleled. While the Fill and Gradient tools are concerned with adding pixels to an image, the next family of tools that we’ll look at does quite the opposite. The Eraser tool lets you remove pixels by simply using a brush, like an anti-paint brush, which enables you to paint away pixels on a layer leaving nothing but transparency behind. The power version of the Eraser is the Background Eraser. This tool is designed to make the extraction of subjects from their background a relatively simple task. Don’t be fooled though – it’s still a tricky proposition, but we’ll show you how to avoid the pitfalls of this technique so that you can achieve the best possible results every time. 55ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Gradients, Fills and Erasing Page 64 Blend two or more image layers together with Gradients Page 62 Use gradients and blending layers to simulate photographic filters Page 66 Learn how to avoid the pitfalls of the Background Eraser tool Page 56 Learn how to fill colours in an image using the Paint Bucket tool Page 57 Fill with 50% grey for special effects and image enhancement Page 59 We look at the Gradient tool and its various options
  • 56. The Paint Bucket The Paint Bucket tool lets you pour pixels into any selection,and it has a few tricks too 56 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 5 Missing Paint Bucket? Photoshop’s toolbar has undergone many revisions over the years,so the Paint Bucket may be located elsewhere in older versions. Select and fill Save time by using the Paint Bucket in one fell swoop, instead of using the Magic Wand to make a selection and then filling it. Instead, what happens is the same as with the Magic Wand tool.The Paint Bucket searches for similar coloured pixels to fill, within the tolerance that you set, rather than covering the whole layer. Increase the Tolerance setting in the Option bar to fill a wider range of colours. 4 However, the Paint Bucket has more in common with the Magic Wand than you think. If your selected area already has image pixels in it, clicking on the image will not necessarily fill the whole selection or layer. 3 It can operate in Foreground Colour mode or in Pattern mode, which you choose from the drop-down menu in the Options bar.You can then select a pattern from the drop-down presets menu, also in the Option bar, and click in the image to fill it. 2 The Paint Bucket can be found in the sixth row of the toolbar in Photoshop 7, in the same tool group as the Gradient tool. If you make a selection you can use this tool to fill it with the current foreground colour. 1
  • 57. 57ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Gradients, Fills and Erasing In the mode In Overlay mode 50% grey pixels are totally transparent.Pixels brighter than 50% are applied in Screen mode, while those darker than 50% are applied in Multiply mode. Video tutorials On the CD this month is a set of video training tutorials created by our very own Photoshop guru, George Cairns.If you want to learn more about using every tool in the Photoshop toolbar,you’ll find your CD invaluable. The layer is filled with the grey, by making sure the Use All Layers option is off and clicking in it. Now we can set the Layer mode to Overlay and apply the noise, blur it slightly, then change the opacity of the layer any time we want to control the effect. 8 We need to soften the noise, by blurring it but not the image. So we need to apply the noise in a layer above the image. However, the Noise filter does not work on a transparent layer. Enter the Paint Bucket. The Foreground Colour is set to 50% grey using Colour Picker and setting Lab Lightness to 50, A and B to 0. 7 Another use for fills is for special effects. An example is for adding noise to a 3D or digital image to make it look more like photographic film.We could simply apply noise to the image directly but this limits our options later if we want to change the noise, say, to make it less obvious. Applying the noise as-is also tends to looks fake. 6 Using a lower tolerance you can build up the fill by clicking a couple of times on different areas of the image.In this example we did so in a new layer.You have to make sure the Use All Layers option is checked when using a transparent layer for the fill. Applying the layer in Color mode allows us to change the colour of the girl’s kagool. 5
  • 58. The Paint Bucket enables you to fill areas using a tolerance setting like the Magic Wand tool. It also has settings to fill contiguous pixels – or not, as the case may be. Enabling the Contiguous mode in the Paint Bucket tool’s Options bar (this is the default setting) only fills pixels that are both within the tolerance and physically connected in the image. Disabling this mode causes the Paint Bucket to search over the whole image for pixels similar to the one that you click on. The Anti-aliasing option simply means that the edges of the fill are smoothly anti-aliased to remove any unsightly jagged edges. More Fill options The Paint Bucket is just one of a number of ways in which you can fill an image or selection 58 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 5 The difference between the smooth anti-aliased fill (green) and the jagged non-anti-aliased fill (pink) is quite obvious in this close-up Fetching patterns Custom fill patterns can be found on the web. Here’s the address of a site where you can download free Photoshop patterns: http://graphicssoft.about. com/library/free/ blfree_pspatterns1.htm Keep it cool Fills and patterns are useful for creating backdrops for web pages.Be careful though,because patterned backgrounds can be very distracting, so keep them as subtle as possible. YOU CAN fill using the current foreground colour by typing [Alt]+ [Delete].Typing [Ctrl]+[Delete] (or [Command]+[Delete] for Mac users) will fill using the current background colour. Pressing the [D] key reverts the colour to the default black and white. ANOTHER WAY to fill is using the Edit > Fill menu command.This has a few extras, such as a pop-up menu for choosing to fill with either White, Black, Foreground or Background colour, or the handy‘50% Grey’. THE FILL Command also enables you to fill using the earmarked history state in the History palette.You can furthermore set it to Pattern mode and choose a pattern from within the Fill dialog. CHOOSE YOUR pattern from one of Photoshop’s presets or use your own custom-made pattern if you prefer. Any rectangular selection can be stored as a pattern using the Edit > Define Pattern command. FILLING TIPS
  • 59. The Gradient tool The Gradient tool is indispensable when working on multi-layered documents 59ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Gradients, Fills and Erasing Degrees of constraint Hold down the [Shift] key while dragging to constrain the angle of your gradient to 45-degree increments. Gradient presets While using the Gradient tool right-click to pop up the gradient presets palette.Mac users will need to press [Ctrl] instead. The distance you drag will define the width of the gradient. It can by very tight if you only drag a little way (top) or very loose if you drag a long way (bottom). Note that before the first point the pixels are made up of 100% first colour, and after the last point they are 100% last colour. 4 The Gradient tool can be found in the sixth row of the toolbar, and has an icon with a small black-to-white gradient. Use the tool by simply dragging out a line indicating the direction of the gradient.The first point you click defines where the first colour will end, and the point where you release the mouse after dragging is where the second (or last colour if it has more the two) will begin. 3 ...or colourful, like this red-to-green gradient.You can also blend a monotone colour, like black or white into a colour such as red, and the brightness and saturation of the colour will smoothly blend across the distance that you specify. 2 A gradient is very simply two colours spread over a distance and smoothly blended from the one to the other.They can be monotone, like this simple black-to-white linear gradient… 1
  • 60. The GradientTool continued 60 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 5 See-through options TheTransparency check-box in the Options bar allows you to turn off the transparent part of a gradient if it is enabled. Make it noisy The Dither check-box enables a dithering or jitter to the gradient, adding a touch of noise,which can help reduce banding effects when printing. Custom gradients can contain any number colours that you specify and are edited in the Gradient Editing panel.They can also incorporate transparency. Here is a custom preset that combines a multicolour gradient with alternating transparency. 8 Foreground to Transparent takes the current foreground colour and blends it to nothing, leaving only transparent pixels. This can be great for blending gradients over images, for example. 7 Foreground to Background mode simply uses the current foreground colour as the first point, and the current background colour as the last point and creates a blend between them. 6 There are actually three types of gradient. Foreground to Background, Foreground to Transparent, and Custom. Each type is selected from the preset pop-up in the Gradient tool’s Option bar.There are usually a number of preset custom gradients available. 5
  • 61. When the Gradient tool is selected, clicking on the preset sample at the top-left of the Option bar opens up the Gradient Editor panel. Here you can choose from a range of ready-made gradients, or create your own. To create a custom gradient just select a preset and begin editing the colours of the ‘nodes’ in the editing strip at the bottom of the panel. The top of the strip contains the transparency nodes, while the bottom contains the colour nodes. Click on a node (or ‘Color Stop’ as Adobe calls them) to edit its colour. The Stops section lets you edit the properties of the selected stop. The Gradient Editor panel Editing gradients is done in the Gradient Editor panel in Photoshop 6 onwards 61ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Gradients, Fills and Erasing Clicking on a colour node,(or‘Stop’as Adobe calls them) in the gradient strip at the bottom of the panel selects it for editing. Changing stops Creating new stops is done by clicking in free space above or below the gradient strip.To remove a stop, drag it away and let go. Stops can be moved by dragging them left or right. The Preset list is displayed at the top.You can change the size of the previews from the panel’s pop-up menu. You can change the type of gradient from the pop-up. The options are Color (normal) and Noise. Create a new preset from the current gradient strip by clicking on this button here. The Color Stops (or nodes) are displayed underneath the gradient strip.Click on one to select it for editing.Clicking where there is no stop present adds a new one. the Transparency Stops are displayed on top of the gradient strip.They can be either white,black or shades of grey only. When you select a Colour or Transparency Stop its mid-point handle is also displayed.Drag this to change the rate of blending between nodes. THE GRADIENT EDITOR EXPLAINED
  • 62. Using Gradients creatively Now let’s look at how useful Gradients can be when working creatively in Photoshop 62 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 5 Trial and error Experiment with all the Layer Blending modes and get a feel for how they affect the image. Some will have similar pleasing effects,while others will just look plain awful. Comprehend the blend There are technical explanations for each of the Blending modes in your Photoshop Manual or online guide.It's worth going through these to understand exactly what's going on. In a new layer, we add a Foreground to Transparent gradient once more, but choose a much darker blue.The layer mode is this time set to Multiply, creating a dark cast over the image. Finally, a Levels Adjustment Layer is added to the image, which controls all brightness and gamma. 4 Another use for gradients is to add mood to a Photo. Here’s an image of a model looking quite moody, but the picture itself could be even moodier. It’s simple with a gradient to add that mood. 3 In a new layer we add a vertical dark blue transparent gradient over the image. Setting the layer’s blending mode to Overlay blends the colour and brightness of the gradient in a special way, creating a deeper, darker sky. 2 Gradients are great for those working with digital or scanned photographic images in Photoshop.We can use gradients in place of traditional photographic filters to create some cool effects. Here’s the original unfiltered image. 1
  • 63. Gradient Styles The Linear gradient is only one of five styles. We’ll look at the others and see what they offer 63ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Gradients, Fills and Erasing Turn it around The invert button in the Options bar reverses the direction of the colours in the gradient. Quick sample Use the [Alt] key to activate the Eye Dropper.You can then choose colours for the gradient from your image. Finally, the Diamond style is similar to the Radial style, except that the edges form a square rather than a smooth circle. This can be useful for certain kinds of vignette effects, for example. 4 Next up is the Reflected style.This type of gradient can be useful, especially for creating masks and selections. In this case a Linear gradient is created, but in opposite directions from where you drag. 3 The next style option is the Circular style.This is not a common one to use, but can be useful. In this case the gradient is wrapped around in a circular motion.The line you drag doesn’t mark the size of the gradient, but only the direction of the colours. 2 At the top of the Gradient tool’s Options bar next to the preset pop-up are the Gradient Styles. Linear is the default, but next to it is the Radial style. Selecting this creates a radial gradient using the selected preset. The first point you click is the center of the gradient, dragging outwards to the edges. 1
  • 64. Gradient Masks Use a simple black and white gradient in a layer mask for creating composite images 64 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 5 Application options You can apply masks to adjustment layers as well as normal image layers.So we could have applied the levels as an adjustment layer using the same gradient trick to mask out its effect on the lower part of the image. Vignettes Create vignettes using a Radial gradient as a layer mask applied to a Solid Fill Layer.You can then adjust the colour of the fill to suit different uses. Finally Image > Adjustment > Levels is applied to the Sky layer (not to the mask). In the dialog box that appears, drag up the black input slider to darken the sky and making it match better with the image below. 4 A layer mask is added to the Sky layer, by clicking the New Layer Mask button at the bottom of the Layers palette. Making sure the layer mask is selected and not the layer, we can use a black-to-white linear gradient to mask out the bottom of the sky layer, blending the two images together. 3 One image is copied into the other by dragging its layer from the Layers palette over the other’s image window and releasing the mouse.The sky image is scaled roughly to fit using the Free Transform tool. 2 One very popular use of the Gradient tool is to make one image blend smoothly into another. Here are two images that we want to composite, by blending one gradually into the other. 1
  • 65. Because Photoshop handles transparency as a mask, a simple black and white gradient can be used to smoothly manipulate layer transparency. Photoshop also enables us to convert a mask into a selection and vice-versa. For example, you can create a gradient selection by switching to the Channels palette, creating a new alpha channel and drawing a gradient in it. Then by [Command]+ clicking on the alpha channel, it can be loaded as a selection: black areas are unselected, white areas are fully selected, shades of grey are partially selected, depending on brightness. So loading a gradient in this way creates a variable selection, through which we can apply filters, paint or whatever. Another way to do the same thing would be to enter Quick Mask mode, apply the Gradient tool on the Quick Mask, then press [Q] to convert it to an active selection. Once a gradient selection is made, you can convert it to a layer mask simply by adding a layer mask to a layer with the selection active. Masks and selections in detail We’ll look at some different ways to create gradient masks and selections 65ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Gradients, Fills and Erasing Goodbye halo If applying a filter such as Gaussian Blur through a gradient selection it’s best to apply the filter multiple times with a small value. Otherwise you will get a ‘halo’around the partially selected pixels rather than a smooth blur. As we’ve seen, we can use gradients as layer masks when compositing images.We can also apply gradients to layers using blending modes to get different effects. Another use, which is sort of between the two, is to control the effects of an adjustment layer with a gradient mask. It helps to make the gradient selection first, as described above, then add your adjustment layer. Unlike pixel-based layers, adjustment layers are created automatically with a layer mask. Any current selection will become the layer mask for this new layer. Make the adjustment, such as increasing the contrast, and see the results as applied through the mask directly. GRADIENT LAYER MASKS WITH ADJUSTMENT LAYERS Here’s another handy way of using Gradients A Hue/Saturation Adjustment Layer is applied to this image using a gradient layer mask
  • 66. Magic and Background Erasers One is like the Eraser and Magic Wand in one, while the other is ideal for cutting out objects 66 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 5 Know the limits In all honesty the Magic Eraser is not one of the best tools in Photoshop's arsenal.It can be useful for quickly erasing something but only works well on a limited range of images. Look elsewhere There are a number of third party tools available that do a better job at removing backgrounds than Photoshop’s Eraser tools. Our Dog image proves to be far more difficult a proposition, however. Although the Magic Eraser works fairly well on the sky, on the grass it doesn’t do so well. This is because the grass is so varied in colour and brightness that the Eraser has a hard job of finding the right colours to remove. 4 After a couple of clicks the whole backdrop is erased, leaving a nice clean-edged subject surrounded by transparent pixels.This is useful if you then want to save the image as a GIF for example, with transparency intact. 3 Alternatively you can cut out the middle man (or woman as is quite literally the case here) by using the Magic Eraser tool.With this tool you can click on the background to erase it directly in one click. All colours that fall within the tolerance setting are deleted. 2 In an image such as this it is fairly easy to remove the subject from the background because there is a definite difference in colour between them. Photoshop has many ways of doing this, you could make a selection using the Magic Wand tool then delete it, for instance. 1
  • 67. 67ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Gradients, Fills and Erasing Background details Like the Magic Wand, the Background Eraser has aTolerance setting but also Limits and Sampling Method options.Continuous lets you sample as you paint,while the Once option samples only on the first click. Background Swatch lets you save a colour to use as the sample. Glitch invasion The Background Eraser is not a tool that a professional Photoshop user would feel at home with. It tends to leave far too many glitches in the edge of the cut-out objects,which take extra time to fix up later. It’s still slightly messy, but the bulk of the rest of the background can be deleted using a rough selection. It’s the bits near to the subject that cause the problem, and the Background Eraser does a pretty good job of keeping the parts you want and deleting those you don’t. 8 The tool has a boundary like a normal brush and a central cross.When you paint you must keep quite close to the edge of the object you wish to keep, without actually touching it.The tool samples and erases as it goes, but does so only within the brush area. If you slip and accidentally cross over onto your object then it will be deleted, so care is required. 7 Using the Background Eraser tool (you’ll find it in the Eraser tool group in the sixth row of the toolbar) results in a more controllable method of chopping the pooch out of his environment.The tool is brush- based, so you simply paint away to remove the background. 6 Turning off the Contiguous option might improve matters.This makes the tool search the whole image for similar colours, rather than just examining pixels that are connected to the starting point. Unfortunately we end up losing most of our dog as well when we try this method. 5
  • 68. Chapter 6 GETTING TO KNOW THE EFFECTS TOOLS When it comes down to it, Photoshop is mostly about effects. Be it a simple vignette, a crop or even an image enhancement, what you are really doing is creating some kind of effect to spice up an image. Photoshop’s filters offer you a broad palette of effects, which can be applied to images, both very subtly or dramatically. Combine filters with selections and masks, layers and blending modes and you have a cornucopia of digital tricks that can improve an image no end. Photoshop also has a small group of effects-based tools which work in a similar way to the filters and adjustment features in many In this chapter… Blur or sharpen parts of an image using the ‘focus’ tools Create finger-painting effects or blend colours using the Smudge tool Create better composite images using ‘exposure’ tools Make your subject stand out with Dodge and Burn effects Photoshop’s effects tools include Blur,Sharpen, Smudge,Dodge and Burn.We’ll look at how best to use them to spice up your artwork, composites and photographic images respects, but do so in a more artistically controllable way. Essentially these are brush-based filters, allowing you to ‘paint’ the effects just where you need them. Focus and exposure Effect tools are in two different groups. The ‘focus’ tools are in the seventh row of the toolbar in Photoshop 7 and consist of the Blur, Sharpen and Smudge tools. ‘Exposure’ tools are directly to the right of this and contain the Dodge, Burn and Sponge tools. Click and hold on the groups to reveal all the tools in that group. You’ll also note that next to each tool is a letter. This
  • 69. is the tool’s shortcut key, and there is one for almost every tool in Photoshop’s toolbar. Pressing that key will activate the respective tool no matter what else is selected. The ‘focus’ tools – Blur and Sharpen – allow you to apply these filter-like effects directly to pixels in the image using any of Photoshop’s brushes – including the complex, customisable brush shapes. But most of the time you’ll find it best to use these tools with a normal, soft, round brush. The Smudge tool works in a slightly different way, however, and we’ll look at how to use that particular tool more closely later in the chapter. The ‘exposure’ tools – Dodge, Burn and Sponge also let you paint their effects onto an image directly. These tools produce effects similar to the Adjustment tools like Levels, Curves and Hue/Saturation. Shadow play Using the exposure tools is an excellent way of producing photo- realistic composites. The tools enable you to paint additional shadows or highlights in precisely the right areas, to give composited elements the correct shading. The shadows will then look like they really belong there – which is just the effect you’re after. 69ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Effects Tools Page 75 Dodge and Burn adjust pixel contrast and brightness by painting them Page 73The Smudge tool lets you apply paint with a finger-painting effect Page 79 Focus in on an object within an image by Burning the background Page 70The Blur tool works by blurring the pixels in an image,to varying intensity Page 71 Decreasing the brush spacing allows for a more intense Blur effect Page 72 Maximise the usefulness of the Sharpen tool,with its blending modes
  • 70. The‘focus’tools The‘focus’tools are simple to use when you understand how they work.Let’s explore them 70 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 6 Pop-up palette You can also pop up the brushes preset palette by right-clicking in the image window.Mac users will need to hold down [Ctrl] and click. In a hurry? The pop-up Brushes palette can be momentary ([Alt]+ click+hold) or persistent ([Alt]+click+release) enabling you to choose a brush quickly or browse at leisure. The tool applies the effect continually so even if you stop moving the mouse the effect continues to be applied.The strength slider therefore does not control the maximum amount of blur, but rather the rate at which blurring will intensify. On the right the blur tool is applied for 5 seconds at 10%, and on the left 5 seconds at 100%. 4 The Strength slider in the Options bar controls the intensity of the blur – how quickly the blur intensifies as you paint. Use the numeric keypad to quickly type in the strength you require. For example, pressing the 1 key on the keypad equals 10% strength, 5 equals 50%, and 0 equals 100%. Here’s the same stroke applied once at 10%, 50% and 100% strength to the pattern’s bottom edge. 3 The tool uses the normal brushes interface and preset menu, accessible from the Options bar as usual. Most of the time you’ll be using the Blur tool with just a normal, round, soft brush rather than anything fancy. 2 The Blur tool can be selected from the seventh row of the toolbar or with the a shortcut key [R]. Simply put, you can use this tool to soften edges and detail in an image by painting over it. 1
  • 71. The Blur tool 71ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Effects Tools Blurred or focused? The trick for a successful blurring effect,as on the girl’s portrait,is to apply the blur tool only to parts of an image and leave key areas,such as the eye,in focus. Blurred light Other blending modes on offer – Hue,Colour and Saturation,are less suitable modes to use with the Blur tool in most cases. But Lightness can be quite handy,as it blurs the details but not the colours. Setting it to Lighten mode does the opposite and creates a light glow or halo.This is a great way to soften bright highlights within an image in order to create soft focus and bloom effects on otherwise dead sharp images. 8 The tools can be set to different blending modes, and this can be very useful for certain effects. In Darken mode, blurring parts of an image creates an eerie dark glow around objects.The result is actually similar to some types of old cinematic film. 7 There is however a simple way to overcome this and to boost the Blur tool’s power.What you need to do is edit the Spacing setting for the brush you are using. The default 25% spacing is often not enough. Reducing the Spacing means the‘flow’of the effect in increased,so blurring is given a boost. 6 Even with the tool set to 100% strength it can seem like it doesn’t blur to a very high degree. In fact it feels like it reaches a plateau where it no longer has any effect.This is because as the pixels get more blurry you need an ever stronger blur to see any effect. But since the strength is at maximum, the tool just appears to come to a halt. 5
  • 72. The Sharpen tool The antithesis of the Blur tool is the Sharpen tool.No prizes for guessing what this tool does 72 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 6 A sharp escape When working on large images with large brushes,the Blur and Sharpen tools can take some time to calculate. If you want to stop the calculation of a blur or sharpen while in progress,press the [Esc] key. Slick selection Selecting the general area before using the Blur or Sharpen tool can speed things up. To reduce the multicolour noise effect, switching to the tool’s blending mode, to Luminosity, is a great help. Now only the brightness details in the image are sharpened but not the colour, which is often where the noise resides. 4 The Sharpen tool works best when the Strength slider is kept low – on photographic images, or those that have been compressed using lossy compression such as JPEG, the sharpening can increase‘noise’– the pixels become too sharp and stand out too much from the image.Therefore, too high a strength setting for the sharpening effect can ruin the image. 3 You could of course construct a mask to protect the blurred areas, but using the Sharpen tool with a large soft brush it’s simply a matter of painting in where you want the sharpening to occur. Noise in blurred parts is therefore kept at bay. 2 The Sharpen tool is used to selectively sharpen pixels in an image.This can be very useful, as in this image, where there is variable focus. Applying the Sharpen filter can sharpen unwanted noise in the blurred parts of the image. 1
  • 73. In the focus tool group you’ll also find the Smudge tool. Its inclusion in this group is a slightly moot point because it has more in common with the Paintbush, at least in the way it’s used. A look at the Smudge tool’s options in the Options bar at the top of the Photoshop interface reveals its various properties. There is the usual Brushes Presets drop-down menu, where you can select any of Photoshop’s brushes, the Blending mode menu, Strength slider, Multiple Layers option, and the Finger Painting mode, which smears the foreground colour onto the image, using the other pixels. The Smudge tool The Smudge tool is more like a spacial paintbrush than a focus effect – here’s why 73ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Effects Tools In Finger Painting mode,the foreground colour is mixed with the original image pixels,while in Normal mode only the image pixels are used Activate with R The [R] key activates the uppermost tools in the focus tool group.[Shift]+[R] cycles through the Blur,Sharpen and Smudge tools. Smudge it Use the Smudge tool in the same way as you would your finger when working with pencil or charcoal.Smudging a textured brush will smooth it out. IN NORMAL mode the Smudge tool smears the pixels along the direction of the brush stroke.The Strength slider is important here. Setting it low causes the smudge effect to fade out as you brush.You can set the strength from 1% to 99%, but setting it to 100% enables a special mode – the first pixels you click on are sampled and smeared indefinitely, for as long as you paint. ALL LAYERS lets you smudge colours from all layers. However, the results is only applied to the currently active layer, not to all the layers. It only means that the Smudge tool samples from all the layers. THE SMUDGE tool can take a lot of computation,especially for large brushes.If your computer is grinding to a halt,try reducing the brush size. MAKING USE of the blending modes can be a lot of fun. For example, Lighten mode can create glowing swirls and streaks on an image. THE SMUDGE TOOL’S OPTIONS IN DETAIL
  • 74. Working with the Smudge tool Here’s how to use the Smudge tool to create some amazingly eye-catching effects 74 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 6 Smudge control The Smudge tool’s dynamic settings can be set up to respond to a graphics pen’s pressure and/or tilt for extra response and feedback. New layer The Smudge tool has a Use All Layers option. You can use this to smudge pixels on all visible layers.It’s best to do this on a new clean layer so you can undo the effect easily if necessary. Setting the Fade control on the Other Dynamics section to alter the Strength property creates a brush that gently fades the strength, so that it’s 100% to begin with and 1% at the end.The Fade value represents the distance over which the effect is faded. 4 What can be useful is editing the current brush to enable the Fade setting. Clicking on the button at the far right of the Options bar opens the Brushes palette. In the Shape Dynamics section the Size control can be set to Fade and a value for the distance in pixels entered.This creates a tapering smudge, useful for creating wisps and curls. 3 The Strength slider controls the length of the smudge effect. A low Strength setting smudges only slightly, but it will continue for as long as you keep the mouse button pressed. 2 Using the Smudge tool is pretty intuitive. Set to a very high strength, 90% here, the tool continually samples colours from the image you are smudging, dragging the colours with it as it goes. 1
  • 75. Dodge and Burn The Dodge and Burn tools enable you to add subtle or intense shading to an image 75ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Effects Tools Burn your own material Use the Burn tool to add shadows to objects you create from scratch in Photoshop – such as when creating photo- realistic images and graphics. Dodge the issue Use the Dodge tool to add Highlights to objects that you have created from scratch in Photoshop. With the Dodge tool set to Midtones mode only the middle range of tones is affected.The brightest and darkest pixels are unaltered.You can see that a lot of otherwise invisible detail has been revealed. 4 In Highlight mode the Dodge tool lightened only the brightest pixels in the image.With an image that has strong contrast such as this it’s easy to overexpose the highlights and blow them out. 3 Both the Dodge and Burn tools operate in three modes, which can be selected from the Options bar.These are the Highlights, Midtones and Shadows modes. By default the Dodge tool operates in Highlights mode, and the Burn tool in Shadows mode.We’ll demonstrate the differences, but first here is the original image before the exposure tools are used. 2 The Dodge and Burn tools are two sides of the same coin and refer to traditional photographic techniques.The Dodge tool is used to lighten pixels in an image, while the Burn tool darkens them. Here are two strokes to illustrate each tool.The image has been Dodged on the left, Burned on the right. 1
  • 76. Dodge and Burn continued 76 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 6 To the extreme Both the Dodge and Burn tools don’t seem to work well when affecting the opposite ends of the tonal spectrum.There are situations where this can be useful,but they tend to be used very subtly. Background elements Focusing in on a subject by dampening the highlights of background elements using the Burn tool is a good example of the tip above. There’s something familiar about this one. In Highlights mode, the Burn tool lowers the brightness of the brightest pixels, resulting in what looks like a stroke of transparent black paint across the image. So the Burn tool works best in Shadows and Midtones mode and the Dodge tool works best in Highlights and Midtones mode. 8 In Midtones mode the middle range of tones is darkened leaving the darkest and lightest pixels as they were.This is like applying the gamma slider in the Levels dialog to darken an image’s midtones, but only where you paint. 7 If we start with a very light image and use the Burn tool we can better see its effects. Here in Shadows mode, the tool picks out the dark areas in the image and makes them even darker. 6 In Shadows mode, it’s the darkest pixels that get lightened. this is quite a different result. it looks like we’ve painted across the image with a transparent white brush – not good at all. 5
  • 77. The Sponge tool The Sponge tool is the cousin of Dodge and Burn.It varies the saturation level in an image 77ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Effects Tools Spray the sponge The Sponge tool has an Airbrush mode. You can click and hold to continually apply the effect. Colour Range Make a selection using Color Range to focus the Sponge tool on certain colours in the image. A better way to go about this is to apply Hue/Saturation to the whole image before you desaturate it with the Sponge.This lets you see how much saturation to apply, rather than flatten out the colours.You can even control the saturation of the colours independently using the pop-up menu. 4 Switching to Saturate mode, you’d think it would be easy to increase the saturation of the girl to enhance the effect. However as you can see even when we lower the strength setting, the result is uneven, and in some places the colours have‘flattened’out due to over-saturation. 3 You can of course perform this kind of action using the Hue/Saturation command or an Adjustment Layer. But the Sponge tool does the same thing in a more hands-on way. Here, we’ve painted on the image with the Sponge tool in Desaturate mode to make the girl stand out from the background more. 2 Using the Sponge tool couldn’t be easier. It’s a very simple tool that makes pixels either less or more Saturated. By saturation, we mean how colourful a pixel is. More saturated colours are vivid, while less saturated ones are washed out. 1
  • 78. Using the Dodge and Burn tools is quite simple but you need to take into account certain things, in order to get the best results. The Dodge and Burn tools are often used to add shading to elements in a composite image so that they match the background or other elements in the image. Look for shadows in the image to find out where the main light is coming from. Highlights – parts of the object in direct illumination – can be added by painting with the Dodge tool in Highlight and/or Midtones mode, while shadows can be painted on with the Burn tool in Shadows and/or Midtones mode. Using Dodge and Burn Here’s how the Dodge and Burn tools work in real,or surreal,situations 78 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 6 The direction of the light cast on other elements or in the background image,determines where to apply effects with the Dodge and Burn tools Toggle tools Use the [Alt] key to toggle between the Dodge and Burn tools as you work.There’s no need to stop and switch tools manually. The Options bar is where you’ll find the different modes and the strength slider for the exposure tools. Airbrush mode is available for the Dodge,Burn and Sponge tools.This applies the effect constantly while the mouse is held down,so there’s no need to wiggle the mouse to intensify the effect in a certain spot. These areas in the image have been darkened by painting on the image using the Burn tool,and setting it to Shadows mode. The Sponge tool has been used in many of the dodged and burned areas to desaturate the image in those places. Dodge,Burn and Sponge tools are located in the ‘exposure’tool group in Photoshop 7’s toolbar. These areas in the image have been lightened by painting using the Dodge tool in Highlights mode. THE EFFECTS OF DODGE,BURN AND SPONGE
  • 79. FocusinginwithDodgeandBurn Dodge and Burn is a great way of focusing in on the subject of an image,or even a new area 79ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Effects Tools Faded paint After using the Dodge,Burn or Sponge tools,you can used the Edit > Fade command to vary the intensity of the last stroke you painted. Fade away The Fade command actually works with most of the brush- based tools in Photoshop.You can often change the blending mode here as well as the opacity. Using Shadows mode is probably not a good idea in this case because you would be changing the contrast balance between the subject and background in a more unnatural way. 4 We can work on the background layer, (having made a copy of it) with the layer mask applied to protect the main leaf.We’ll use the the Burn tool set to Highlight mode and a low opacity. Keeping the brush strokes loose and slightly random, we can dampen the brightness of the surrounding leaves. 3 We can force the image to have a subject by picking one of the leaves and then adjusting the rest using Dodge and Burn. First we isolate the subject leaf by creating a mask for it using the Magnetic Lasso and then Quick Mask mode to touch up the edges. 2 Here’s a good example of an image that has no focus. It would work well as a texture or background, but the uniformity of the subject makes it difficult to pick out any one leaf as the main subject in the image. 1
  • 80. Chapter 7 WORKING WITH THE TYPE TOOL IN PHOTOSHOP Type and text has numerous applications in Photoshop. You can create logos, web buttons, cool 3D text, even paragraphs of prose using the Type tool. In earlier versions of the program, text was a very basic affair. You created text as a selection which could be filled with a colour in a layer or applied as a layer mask to create type that knocked out part of an image, or was itself filled with an image or texture. In Photoshop 7, text has become a fully-fledged feature, and the most important aspects of this are its Type Layers. Like Adjustment Layers, Solid Fill and Gradient Layers, Type Layers are ‘live’. This means that the In this chapter… Using the Type tool and Type layers Creating type effects with Layer Styles Managing, transforming and distorting type Creating text in Photoshop is quite easy to do, whether it’s for artistic effect or simply to add essential information.We’ll look at the various options available with the Type tool text is created as real type just like in a word processing program or vector illustration program. The type can be edited, so that you can go back and change the font used, the colour applied or the properties of the text, such as scale, leading (line spacing) and kerning (letter spacing). Quality assured Type layers are produced using vector technology, just like in a vector-based tools such as Illustrator or Freehand, and this has two very important consequences. The first is that type is ‘resolution independent’. This means that you can scale, rotate, stretch and distort type layers
  • 81. and they will never degrade. It is the vector paths that are altered, and the rasterization is performed at the end. You’ll always have crisp, clean type, until the Photoshop document is saved as a flattened image or printed. Pixel perfect The other consequence is that you can, if you wish, decide to keep the text as vectors if you print to a postscript printer. This means that the type is printed at the highest possible quality and is never converted to pixels. Even perfectly rasterized type will print slightly fuzzy at the edges. This is because of the necessary anti-aliasing that is used in order to convert the flowing lines of the vector paths into the rows of square, coloured pixels in a normal image layer. To be honest, printing type as true vectors is only important when producing the highest quality artwork for printing on professional printers. Because of this it only works when out-putting CMYK separations from Photoshop. Note: Rasterization is the process of converting vectors and paths into ‘raster’images, made up of pixels. Once a type layer is rasterized it loses any of its special editable properties and becomes just an ordinary pixel-based layer. 81ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Text Page 87The Warp Text palette lets you distort your type any way you like Page 84 Learn how to distort vector text in later versions of Photoshop Page 89 Use Layer Styles with live layers to create rich and varied text effects Page 82 Older versions created text as selections.Photoshop 7 is more flexible Page 83Type layers in Photoshop 6 and above can be edited at any time Page 84 Get to grips with the idea of different kinds of anti-aliasing for text
  • 82. TheType tool Photoshop’s Type tool allows you to add impressive text and type effects to any image 82 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 7 Twice the size If using an older version of Photoshop without vector text and you need to transform type,do so in a new document that is twice the size of the destination document. The higher resolution will minimise the degradation of the text edges.Resize the image once the transformation is completed, sharpening it as necessary. Computer Arts To discover even more ways to develop your Photoshop skills,check out our sister magazine, Computer Arts. www.computerarts.co.uk Furthermore, if you wanted to edit the mask, to make it smaller or larger, distort it and so on, then the quality of the edge pixels will deteriorate even further. After just a few transformations the edges become fuzzy. 4 While this is fine, the text is not a vector object, so the edges of the type are not always as crisp and clean as they could be. This is due to the anti-aliasing used to smooth non-straight edges of pixel-based images. 3 The type selection could be filled with a flat colour, saved to a channel ready for some channel effects work, or as here applied to an image layer, to create image-filled text. 2 Previously, in releases of Photoshop earlier than version 6, text was created like this, as a selection.You could type in your text in a panel, choose the font and other options but once created, that was it. 1
  • 83. 83ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Text Vectors and rasters Though the type layers are vector-based,just like any vector program Photoshop has to rasterize them in order to display them.But this is an ongoing process.The type itself is still stored internally as a vector. Rescaling with text If you were to rescale a document containing a liveType Layer,the type would scale up correctly along with the pixel layers,but would not suffer any degradation. Even after many transformations, the type layer’s edges remain as crisp and properly anti-aliased, as it was when the type was first created.You don’t have to worry about the edge degrading when working with type layers. 8 Type created like this is‘live’.You can select the layer and make changes to the text it contains, change the font, colour and whatever else you like.Transforming this layer is possible using the Free Transform tool, just as if it was a normal pixel layer. 7 The Type Masks are just like those in older versions of Photoshop, except they are more easily edited while they are being created. Afterwards they are not editable.The normal Type tool creates type as a special vector layer called a Type Layer. 6 The vector text introduced in Photoshop 6 is a whole different ball game.The Text tool, located in the eighth row of the toolbar, contains four different tools. Horizontal and Vertical Type, and Horizontal and Vertical Type Masks. 5
  • 84. The familiar Options bar in Photoshop 7 is home to the Type tool’s Options and Properties. As with all tools the first entry at the top-left is the tool preset picker pop-up, from which you can select preset tool settings, or reset the tool to default. Next is the Horizontal/ Vertical Type toggle, followed by the Font drop-down menu, Font Style and Font Size drop-downs. The next menu is the Anti-aliasing control. This is an interesting feature because it enables you to change the edge anti-aliasing of your text on the fly. The options are None, Sharp, Crisp, Strong and Smooth and range from sharpest to smoothest. Type Options The Type tool’s Options bar is one of the most feature-packed in Photoshop 84 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 7 The Type Anti-aliasing feature controls how smooth the edges of your type is.It’s more noticeable on small type that on larger type. Cycling fonts The Font field can be scrolled through to view alternative fonts,just like the Font Size field.Just place your cursor in it and using the Up/Down arrow keys. Choose the typeface you want to use for the selected type from the Font menu. Choose your paragraph alignment by clicking on the buttons in the Option bar or in the paragraph panel. A text layer is denoted by a large letter T in the layer preview.The layer name is always the first few characters of the text. The Character panel contains many of the properties found in the Options bar plus some extra ones,such as Kerning, Leading and Scale. Text can be warped using the Warp Text panel.This is useful for creating many special text effects. Selected text is highlighted in black.The text colour is inverted when selected, so this type will be black when deselected. AWHISTLE-STOP TOUR OF YOUR TYPE TOOL OPTIONS
  • 85. Type tool tips Some practical tips and advice for getting the most out of Photoshop’s Type tool 85ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Text Quick resizing You can increase or decrease the size of text by placing your cursor in the Size field and using the Up and Down arrows. [Shift]+Up/Down moves the values in larger chunks. Specify units You can specify text size using any units you like. Just place your chosen unit after the number value. For example,20cm is the same as 2362.2 pixels. To set the kerning for your text, open the Character palette by clicking the palette icon in the Type tool’s Options.There’s a letter spacing pop-up menu, where you can choose your desired value. Negative numbers offer tighter spacing. 4 When creating headings and other large type, there is a simple rule that you can apply to get better results. Basically, larger text such as headings – especially chunky bold fonts – can have much tighter kerning (letter spacing) than normal text. Here’s the same word, one with much tighter letter spacing. 3 You’ll notice that the drop-down list only goes up to 72-point text.This is fine for most web page titles and such, but not nearly big enough for images destined for print. If you want larger text, then you have to enter a value in the text field manually. Here we’ve used 500-point text in a 1000x1000- pixel image. 2 When you create text in a Type Layer, one of the main things you’ll want to do is get the text the right size.There are, as always, different ways to do this in Photoshop. The most obvious is the Size menu in the Options Bar. Open it up and choose a size. 1
  • 86. Type tool tips continued 86 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 7 Speedy selections Select text by clicking on it with theText tool.Alternatively you can select a type layer and the text within it by double-clicking the Layer Preview icon. Type tool options TheType tool’s shortcut is,surprise surprise,the [T] key. You can cycle through each tool in the tool ground by typing [Shift]+[T]. Attempting to pan an image while text is selected will result in this. All your text will be replaced by a space. If this happens just click the Cancel Current Edits button in the Option bar to retrieve your previous text as it appeared before you started editing it. 8 The only safe way to navigate your document when in editing mode is to use the View menu or the [Ctrl]+[+/–] shortcut (that’s [Command]+[+/–] on a Mac). At least then you are able to zoom in and out of the image while text is selected. 7 However, when you move your cursor far enough away from the text it turns into the Move tool automatically.This at least gives you the option to move text around without leaving the text editing mode. 6 Selecting text can be tricky, but once you get the hang of it you’ll be fine. Once text has been created you can click on the tick in the Options bar to return to normal Photoshop operation.While text is selected most of the key commands no longer work, so be careful you don’t accidentally add unwanted characters. 5
  • 87. Using theWarpText panel Photoshop won’t let you warp text along a path,but there are still plenty of Warp options 87ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Text Be patient BecauseType Layers are vectors the distortion does not degrade the quality of the type. However,large amounts of text will take longer to distort than a single character. Extra text tools Photoshop has Paragraph tools as well as Character tools. These can be found in the Paragraph palette, which is docked with the Character palette by default. Using nonsense fonts or symbols together with the Warp panel you can get some weird shapes and patterns. It can be fun and – like all the best features – it takes some playing with. 4 Warps can be subtle or pretty severe, depending how you set the sliders. The Horizontal and Vertical sliders control a kind of perspective distortion of the type layer, making it appear to tilt towards or away from you on either axis. 3 There is a Style pop-up menu, from which you can choose numerous distortion types.This is a simple Arc Warp, set to Vertical mode. 2 When you select a‘live’type layer, you can access the Warp Text panel by clicking its icon on the Options bar.The panel opens and allows you to distort the selected type using some simple controls. 1
  • 88. Because type layers are vector- based you cannot apply pixel- based effects to them. So you can’t use filters or paint on them directly, and you can’t apply adjustments to them to change their colour or brightness. You can get around these problems by adding an adjustment layer above your type layer, but you’ll also need a mask if you only want the adjustment applied to the text and not to the layers below. You can change the blending modes of type layers, which results in some interesting type effects, especially over image layers. But to really get stuck into text layers you’ll need to rasterize them. Rasterizing type In order to apply normal Photoshop effects to type,you’ll need to rasterize it first 88 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 7 Flatten it All non-pixel layers can be rasterized in Photoshop,using the appropriate commands in the Layers menu. One way to rasterize type is to Choose the Layer > Rasterize > Type command from the main menu. Another method is to load the type layer as a selection. [Ctrl/Command]+click on the layer icon and create a new layer.Fill this layer with colour using the type selection. You can apply Layer Styles to live type layers.In this case there’s no need to rasterize them beforehand. To rasterize a type layer, right-click on the layer’s name in the Layer Palette and choose Rasterize Layer. If you want to keep the type layer editable,you can make a copy of the layer by dragging it onto the New Layer icon at the bottom of the Layers palette. If you try to do something that requires the type layer to be rasterized,Photoshop may ask you if you wish to do this first in a warning dialog. RASTERIZING YOUR TYPE LAYERS Rasterized type layers act like bitmap layers, because that’s just what they are.This type has been rasterized,blurred and adjusted with levels.
  • 89. StyledType Layer Styles can be used to create stunning type effects for any occasion 89ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Text Quick colour change The Colour Overlay section of the Layer Styles palette can be used to quickly change the colour of your text without changing to theType tool and selecting it. Save your Styles Custom Styles can be saved as presets and stored for reuse by clicking the New Style button in the Layer Styles palette. Text can be‘stroked’using the Stroke section of the Layer Styles.The Stroke function adds an outline to the text, which can be useful if you have filled it with a pattern because the text is more clearly defined. 4 The Pattern option lets you fill the text with any saved pattern. In this case we’ve used an American flag that we had previously saved as a pattern to fill our New York text. 3 To create text with a bit of relief you can use the Bevel and Emboss options to add depth to your text. It helps if the text is not set to 100% white or black, because the Bevel and Emboss effects add black and white shading to create the illusion of depth. 2 With a type layer selected in the Layers palette you can select Layers > Layer Styles and choose an option from the sub-menu to apply that style to the text. In this case a simple drop-shadow has been applied.The Layer Styles panel will automatically pop open. 1
  • 90. Chapter 8 WORKING WITH PATHS,VECTORS AND MASKS Vectors are totally different from pixels: vectors are mathematically defined lines and curves, which you can use to draw perfectly smooth shapes and outlines. Whereas a shape made up of pixels has a definite size and resolution, vectors can be of any size or resolution – they are said to ‘resolution independent’. Furthermore a vector-based image will be a very small file when saved to disk, compared to a pixel-based bitmap image. The same file could be used to make a 128x128 pixel web graphic, or a 5000x5000 pixel poster. The quality will be perfect in both situations. In this chapter… Learn how to use the Pen tool to draw paths Learn how to cut out objects using paths and convert them to selections, and vice-versa Work with Vector Masks to add additional layering capabilities to your documents Learn to use Vector Shapes and imported vector artwork Photoshop has always used vector-based ‘paths’to draw smooth shapes and outlines, but the latest version has the ability to create shapes and masks with vectors too Photoshop has limited capabilities when it comes to saving vector-only files but you can include vector information in a normal Photoshop file. While this means file sizes won’t be quite as small as they would be with a true vector-based program, you will still get all the advantages of a vector’s scalability. Various vectors In Photoshop, vectors come in different varieties: first, there’s the Pen tool, which is used to create ‘Paths’ (Photoshop’s traditional name for vectors) but there are also Vector Shapes; these are a new feature that appears in later versions
  • 91. of Photoshop which you can use in their own special layers, instead of relegating them to the Paths palette. Paths were an alternative method for creating selections in Photoshop, since a path can be loaded as a selection once it’s been drawn. This makes them ideal for cutting out complicated shapes, such as when you’re removing an object from its background – useful when the background is complex and it has become difficult to select using the selection tools. Paths can also be ‘stroked’, making them an alternative painting tool. Stroking a path with a brush is a fun way of turning plain vector shapes and imported artwork into complex painted graphics with the richness of pixel-based brushes. Shape your behaviour Vector shapes behave like layer masks, blocking and revealing parts of the layer to which they are applied. You can edit them with the Pen tool or the Direct Selection tool, and they offer a further level of functionality for the program. Photoshop is not a fully-fledged vector-drawing application such as Illustrator, Freehand or Corel Draw, and probably never will be, but there is surprisingly good support for vector drawing in Photoshop. 91ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Vectors Page 92 Learn how to use paths and work with the Paths palette Page 97 Set overlapping vector shapes to different Boolean modes Page 95 Add Shape Layers to the layer stack when you create a vector shape Page 99 Apply Layer Styles directly to Shape Layers Page 93 Use the Freestyle Pen tool to sketch paths Page 94 Use the Convert tool to alter the control points
  • 92. Using the Pen tools You can use the tools in the Pen family to draw all kinds of paths 92 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 8 Control points Each time you click with the Pen tool,a control point is added. Always try to use as few control points as you can,because it makes the path much easier to control. Path options The Paths palette has an Options menu, where you can choose the size of the display icon,or choose to turn it off. You can combine smooth and sharp control points in a path to make it both smooth and angular – simply click without dragging to place a sharp control point where you need one. 4 Clicking and dragging pulls out the Bézier handles from a control point, turning it into a smooth point.You can use smooth points to create curved paths, such as this roughly circular path. 3 The Pen toolgroup contains five separate tools.The first is the‘normal’ Pen tool. Use this to draw smooth or angular paths by clicking in the document; clicking without dragging creates a sharp control point used to make angular paths, such as this quadrilateral shape. 2 The Pen tool is located in the ninth row of Photoshop’s toolbar – it’s easy to find because it looks just like its name. In older versions of Photoshop the only place you could create paths was in the Paths palette. All the paths you drew would be located here. 1
  • 93. 93ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Vectors Add anchor points When using the Pen tool,the cursor will automatically change to the Add Anchor Point tool whenever it’s over part of the path.Just click on it to add a point. Quick curves You can edit the curve between two points directly by clicking and dragging it.The handles of the two adjacent points change simultaneously,but do not change their location. Next is the Add Anchor Point tool.This tool enables you to add control/anchor points in between existing points on a path. The path will not change shape when you add a point using this tool. 8 The second tool in the Pen toolgroup is the Freeform Pen tool.With this tool you can literally draw a path, as opposed to clicking to place point.Your freehand sketch will be converted to a path consisting of as few control points as possible. 7 A Path layer in the Paths palette can contain more than one separate path entity. Once you’re finished drawing a path, [Ctrl]+click to end the Pen drawing action so you can start a new path. Mac users should [Command]+click instead. 6 Paths can be open or closed. An open path does not loop back on itself, whereas a closed path does.To close a path, you position the cursor over the starting control point and the Pen cursor will change to show a small‘o’next to its pointer.When you click, the ends of the path will join up. 5
  • 94. Using the Pen tools continued 94 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 8 Load a path To load a path as a selection,[Ctrl]+click on the path icon in the Paths palette (that’s [Command]+ click for Mac users),or click the‘Load path as Selection’button at the bottom of the palette. Convert a selection You can convert a selection into a path by clicking the‘Make Work Path from Selection’button in the Paths palette. Holding down the [Ctrl] key when any of the Pen tools are selected activates the Direct Selection tool (Mac users should hold down the [Command] key).This is the prime editing tool for Paths. Use this tool if you want to move Bézier handles together without breaking them. 12 You can also use the Convert point tool to edit the Bézier handles of a smooth point.When you do this with this tool the Handles will‘break’– that is, they will move independently of each other. 11 The final tool is the Convert Anchor Point tool.This is used to change a sharp point into a smooth one, and vice-versa. To use it, click on a smooth point to convert it into a sharp point (or‘cusp’); drag on a point to convert a sharp point into a smooth one. 10 The fourth tool is the Delete Anchor Point tool.This tool does the opposite of the Add Anchor Point tool: clicking on an existing point on the path with this tool will delete it.You might find that the path will change shape as a result. 9
  • 95. Next to the Pen tool in the ninth row of the tool bar is the Vector Shape tool. This enables you do draw shapes as vector paths or vector masks by dragging them out in the Layers or Paths palette. With the tool selected you can choose from the Options bar what you want to create. You can select the Pen and Freestyle Pen tool from the Vector Shape tool’s Options, but there are also the specific shapes: Ellipse, Rectangle, Rounded Rectangle, Polygon and Line. A third option is the Custom Shape, which enables you to choose a shape from the library of designs that ships with Photoshop. Vector Shapes Vector Shapes are new to later versions of Photoshop – here’s what they do 95ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Vectors A Vector Shape can be created as a mask for a solid fill layer,and optionally,as here,have a layer style automatically applied to it. Preset styles If you choose a Layer Style preset from the Layer Styles preset pop-up before you drag out a shape,that style will be applied to the shape. The Custom Shape option in the Vector Shape’s Option bar gains you access to a large library of custom vector designs. This is a Shape Layer: it is essentially a solid fill layer with a vector mask. Layer Styles can be applied to Shape Layers; here a drop shadow is applied. Photoshop comes with a large collection of custom vector shapes. Your shape can be created in three ways: as a Shape layer,as a plain vector path in the Paths palette,or as a direct pixel fill with no saved vector attributes. Whenever vector shapes overlap in the same layer,you can choose how they will react to one another.The options are: Add,Subtract, Intersect and Exclude. HOW TO CREATE CUSTOM SHAPES
  • 96. UsingVector Shapes Using the Vector Shape tool in versions of Photoshop that support vector shape layers 96 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 8 Arrowheads Arrowheads can be found in the small pop- up menu next to the Custom Shape button in the Options bar. Line width options In Line mode,you can change the line width by entering a value in points in the Options bar.Hold down the [Shift] key when drawing lines to constrain them to 45-degree angles. The fourth option is to do away with any vector information and create the shape as pixels on a normal layer. Using the Line Shape option, this is the only way to simulate the Line tool function in older version of Photoshop. 4 The second option is to create the shape as a simple path in the Paths palette.You do not need to be in the Paths palette to do this, just click and drag in a layer – the vector shape is created in the Paths palette automatically. 3 This creates a Solid Fill Layer and adds the path as a vector mask to the layer. Layers in Photoshop 6 and onwards can have two masks per layer: a vector mask and a normal layer mask. Here a gradient mask is used on the layer as well. 2 When you select the Vector Shape tool, you have three options that determine how shapes will be applied to your document. These options are located at the top-left of the Options bar.The first is Shape Layer mode. 1
  • 97. 97ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Vectors Add mode You can also add to the current vector mask by turning on Add mode in the Boolean options to the right of the Options bar. Chop and change Make complex vector shapes by intersecting, subtracting,adding and excluding more simple ones. You can use the Boolean switches on existing shapes in a vector mask as well, just as you can for shapes that you are about to create. Here we have changed the mode for the third circle from Subtract to Intersect mode. 8 In Add mode, the overlapping vector shapes simply overlap and add together. However, switching to Subtract mode turns the next vector that you draw into a‘cutter’, which you can use to remove portions of the current shapes. 7 In order to add a vector shape to an existing shape layer, you must switch to Path mode and select the Vector Mask Layer. Now when you drag out a vector shape it is added to the same vector mask in the currently selected vector layer. 6 When set to Layer Shape mode, dragging out additional vector shapes creates new vector shape layers, which is not always what you want to happen, and also precludes the use of the vector shape Boolean interaction options. 5
  • 98. Photoshop has more masks than you might realise. There is an additional mask in each layer (besides the background layer, which is always 100% opaque) that you don’t usually see. This is because it’s the layer itself, or rather the surrounding transparent pixels. If you paint on a transparent layer, the brush stroke is surrounded by transparent pixels. The pixels in the layer are a mask in their own right. This can be proved because you can load it as a selection by [Ctrl/ Command]+clicking the layer icon. You can also group layers together into a ‘clipping group’ by [Alt]+ clicking between them on the separator in the Layers palette – the cursors will change to overlapping circles indicating clipping group mode, and clicking will cause the uppermost layer to be indented. The layer will be masked using the bottom layer’s Layer Transparency Mask, and its Layer Mask and its Vector Mask, if these are present. This enables you to quickly mask multiple layers using a single layer or vector mask, and is very useful. Masks A bit of detail about masking to help you get the most out of vector layers and masks 98 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 8 Layer Folders A Layer Folder (aka ‘Layer Set’) can actually hold two masks:a normal layer mask and a vector mask,giving you potential access to four different masks. Photoshop 6 introduced a new kind of layer mask: the Vector Mask.This uses a vector shape to make portions of a layer transparent and works in tandem with the normal layer mask.Vector masks are either on or off: they either hide or show the layer 100%; there is no in-between value like with normal layer masks, which use 255 grayscale values. But what happens if you already have a layer mask and a vector mask on a layer but would really like a third? You can do this through the use of layer folders. Adding a layer folder and placing your layer inside it gives you access to two further masks that can be applied to the folder layer itself. VECTOR MASKS AND LAYER FOLDERS If you run out of masks you can always add a folder A layer folder can be used to add further masks to a layer if you find you need more than two
  • 99. Vector Shape details We’ll look at some of the options that are specific to Vector Shapes 99ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Vectors In a corner You cannot change the radii of the corners of a rounded rectangle after it has been created. Quash confusion Don't confuse the Move tool with the Path Selection tool. The Move tool does not have a 'tail' and cannot be used to move paths individually. The usual copying options apply with paths as well as selections, so you can make a copy of a shape by selecting it and [Alt]+dragging it. Here we’ve duplicated the arrows, and changed their mode to Add. 4 When editing the shapes you need to select the Direct Selection tool.Then you can drag out a marquee around the points you wish to move. Selected points are displayed as filled-in dots; unselected ones are unfilled dots. 3 The Polygon shape tool is used to create regular shapes of any number of sides. Here a triangle is created in Subtract mode to cut a hole in the Rectangle. 2 The Rounded rectangle shape is used to create rectangular shapes and masks with rounded corners. Before you drag out the shape you can set the desired corner size in the Options bar. Add a Layer Style if you like. 1
  • 100. Chapter 9 ANNOTATIONS, NOTES AND THE MEASURE TOOL The ‘notations’ tools, Note and Annotation, can be found in the tenth row of the toolbar in their own tool group. The Note tool allows you to attach informative notes to Photoshop documents. These can be read by other Photoshop users when the document is opened, so the tool can be very useful when using Photoshop collaboratively. It can also be very handy for creating teaching aids in an educational environment. Taking this one step further is the Annotation tool. This allows you to add sound clips to images that can be played by double-clicking their icon. This again provides a useful way to communicate with others working on In this chapter… Add Notes and Annotations to your Photoshop documents Learn which file formats work with Notes and Annotations Use the Eye Dropper tool to sample colours from an image Sample precise pixel values at different points of an image with the Colour Sampler Along with the creative tools,Photoshop provides several tools to add accuracy,sound and vision to your work.These fall into two tool groups – notation and measurement tools a project, or for producing learning aids directly within the program. Measure for measure The measurement tools are very useful utilities in Photoshop. The Measure tool itself lets you measure distances and angles, providing you with precise information that you can use in conjunction with other tools in Photoshop. You can measure the distance between two points, or the total horizontal distance covered, plus you can snap the tool to grids and guides when more precise measurements are needed. The Eye Dropper and Colour Sampler are essential when working
  • 101. professionally with colour, but are also very useful on a day-to-day basis for any Photoshop user. The Eye Dropper can be accessed in various ways in Photoshop. For instance, when the Colour Picker is open, if you move your cursor off the Colour Picker panel and over the image, the cursor automatically changes to an Eye Dropper, enabling you to sample the colour of any pixel. The tool can also be toggled on and off by holding down the [Alt] key when a Brush tool is selected. The Colour Sampler is like the Eye Dropper tool on steroids. You can sample a maximum of four points simultaneously and read their values in the Info palette. This can be extremely useful when making colour adjustments because the Info palette displays the original values both of the sampled pixels and the adjusted values. Colour by numbers The great advantage of these colour measurement tools is that you don’t need to rely on your eye or the dubious colour characteristics of your computer monitor. Instead, you can see the exact values numerically. This accuracy is a real bonus for professional printing needs, but also for achieving good results on a home colour photo printer. 101ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Miscellaneous tools and Utilities Page 106The Colour Sample tool puts up to four sample points on an image Page 105 Sampling options can read the perceived colour from a noisy image Page 107 Use the Measure tool to help straighten out crooked images and scans Page 102 Add notes to images to use as a handy reminder later on Page 103 Sound clips can be added to images,with a microphone Page 105 Choose the foreground or backround colour with the Eye Dropper
  • 102. Notes and Annotations Make notes and annotations,attach them to images,and learn how to open and save them 102 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 9 Name change You can also change the name in the title bar by entering a new one in the field in the Options bar and pressing return. Closing notes To close a Note click the close box in the top-left corner of the Note’s title bar.The Note will collapse to an icon on the image. Double-click it to open it again. To save a document containing a note, you must use one of three file formats. These are Photoshop, Photoshop PDF and TIFF. All the other file formats will discard the note information, as they do not support it. 4 You can have more than one note in a document, and in order to differentiate between them you can choose to give them different colours.The note’s title bar and its icon take on the new colour when collapsed. 3 There is not a lot of editing that you can do to the note text itself, but you can change the font and set the size.There are only five preset sizes: Smallest, Small, Medium, Large and Largest. Smallest and small are practically unreadable, though. 2 Creating a note could not be easier. With the Note tool selected you click on the image where you want the note icon to appear. A window, like a little Post-It note, appears where you can enter your text. 1
  • 103. 103ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Miscellaneous tools and Utilities Take the mic In order to record an annotation you must have a microphone connected to your computer’s sound card or mic input. Colourful sounds Annotations can be coloured using the colour swatch in the Annotation tool’s Options bar.You can reuse annotations from other documents. You can import annotations by selecting File > Import > Annotations. As with notes, documents containing annotations must be saved as either TIFF, Photoshop PDF or plain Photoshop format. If you don’t want to display annotations you can hide them using the View > Show > Annotations menu command. 8 Because the audio annotations are a bit difficult to see it may be wise to build your document with spaces to accomodate them.This is an example of a way to help guide people to the right annotation. 7 Click on Stop to end recording.There is no interface for the audio annotation, you just double-click to hear the recording. If you look hard enough you can just about see the icon next to the Annotation tool’s cursor. 6 With the Annotation tool you can attach a sound clip, usually a spoken sentence, to an image in a similar way to notes. Clicking on the image with the Annotation tool opens a dialog prompting you to start recording. 5
  • 104. The Eye Dropper tool samples the colours of individual pixels in an image, but there is more to it than just being able to set a new foreground colour. In LevelsAdjustment, you can use the Eye Dropper by moving the cursor over the image, and reading the tonal values at different points. To see if the darkest shadows are really black and the lightest really white, hover the Eye Dropper over them and read their values in the Info palette. The palette can display various colour values – CMYK, RGB, LAB and so on. With RGB (Red, Green and Blue pixels) the darkest pixels should read 0,0,0. Pure white reads 255, 255, 255 – the maximum brightness value. TheEyeDroppertool The Eye Dropper is an essential Photoshop tool,especially for achieving colour accuracy 104 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 9 Using the Eye Dropper tool while working with the Levels adjustment panel allows you to read the original and adjust values in the Info palette. Eye Dropper info You can also use the Histogram with the Eye Dropper to read values and gauge the distribution of tones in an image. Select a sampling method from the Options bar.Choose to take a point sample,or measure the average colour within 3x3 or 5x5 pixels. CMYK documents are destined for print and colour is critical in this type of medium.You can check what colour mode the document is in the title bar. Using the Sampler you can look at the darkest an lightest points in an image simultaneously. The Info palette displays colour values differently depending how you have it set up and what colour mode your image is in. The Colour Sampler tool lets you place multiple sample points in an image, marked by‘bull’s eyes’. The colour values for each point are displayed in the Info palette. THE COLOUR SAMPLE TOOL
  • 105. Using the Eye Dropper tool Using the Eye Dropper tool couldn’t be easier, but it boasts a few less obvious features too 105ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Miscellaneous tools and Utilities Colour accuracy The 3x3 average sample size can be more accurate, especially on busy images where the colour varies dramatically. Get a colour update Click and drag over the image to see the colour sample update interactively in the toolbar. To get around this there are two other modes – 3x3 Average and 5x5 Average. Each mode samples a grid of pixels around the one you select,sums their colours and takes the average.The sample is usually a much better match to the colour you perceive by eye. 4 When in Point Sample mode, selected from the Options bar drop-down menu, it can be tricky to sample the perceived colour of a particular area of a noisy image.The actual pixels may vary in colour dramatically and not represent the overall colour of the particular area of the image. 3 To chose a new background colour, you could flip the Foreground and Background swatches using the [X] key, take a sample and flick back, or simply hold down the [Alt] key when the Eye Dropper tool is selected. 2 You can choose a different foreground colour when painting by selecting the Eye Dropper tool from the toolbar and clicking on the image.The tool will sample the colour of the pixel you click in and store it in the Foreground Colour swatch. 1
  • 106. The Colour Sampler The Colour Sampler tool enables you to take up to four colour readings at once 106 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 9 Neutral colours RGB mode stores the image as three colour channels,Red,Green and Blue.If you sample a pixel and each of the values for R,G and B are the same,(say,45,45,45 or 189,189,189) then you know that pixel is a neutral pure grey tone. Colour in confidence Using the absolute colour values is a sure- fire way of proofing certain aspects of an image,since it avoids the vagaries of your computer’s monitor display. Like the Eye Dropper tool, you can set the mode for the sample points to be either single pixels, or averaged pixels (3x3 or 5x5 pixel arrays, around the sample point). The latter are useful for‘noisy’images.To clear all the sample points, click the Clear button in the Option bar. 4 To delete a sample point hold the [Alt] key down and click on the point – the cursor turns to a pair of scissors. Alternatively right-clicking on a sample point will open a pop-up menu from which you can choose the Delete command. Mac users will need to [Ctrl]-click for the latter function. 3 You can move sample points around after they have been created, and they are truly permanent. Even if you close the document, and reopen it the sample points will have been stored. Displaying colours in RGB mode in the Info palette helps you gauge the neutrality of tones in an image. 2 The Colour Sampler tool in the Eye Dropper tool group (tenth row of the toolbar) can be used to place multiple permanent sample points on an image to help while adjusting the image’s colour.The Info palette displays the colour reading. 1
  • 107. The Measure tool Taking measurements is very useful for accurate drawings or precise transformations 107ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Miscellaneous tools and Utilities Diagonal perfection Hold down the [Shift] key to constrain the Measure tool’s angle to 45-degree increments. This is useful when you want to measure a perfect diagonal. Auto measurements With the Free Transform tool, the value will automatically be applied after taking an angle measurement.If it’s in the wrong direction, simply add or delete a minus sign in front of the angle value in the Options bar. A single line’s angle is displayed too, which can be useful for straightening crooked images.You can measure a line that should be straight and then use the Image > Rotate Canvas > Arbitrary command.You don’t need to enter the value you measured, because it’s already been entered for you. 4 To measure an angle drag out the Measure tool along one edge, then [Alt]- drag from the end point to pull out a second line.The angle between the two lines is displayed in degrees in the Option bar and Info palette. 3 The measurement is given in the Options bar, and the Info palette, in this case the line is 280 pixels thick.We can now make a duplicate line with the same thickness by entering 280px in the Line tool’s Size field. 2 The Measure tool can be found in the tenth tool group along with the Eye Dropper tool.You can use this tool to measure distances, widths and angles directly in the image. Here we can measure the exact size of an object by dragging with the Measure tool. 1
  • 108. Chapter 10 CREATING TOP QUALITY ARTWORK Photoshop has many uses, ranging from film and television graphics, to 3D texturing, to web design, to colour correction and printing. All are different, yet Photoshop has the toolset to enable artists working in totally different disciplines to get the best results from their work. Photoshop is also a superb photographer’s tool, providing digital darkroom capabilities that are second to none. And with the proliferation of digital cameras available these days, the importance of Photoshop as a photographic tool has never been greater. What’s more, the ease of workflow and smart In this chapter… See how Photoshop’s tools can be used to construct a complex, montage-based illustration Learn the tricks of the trade to create more professional-looking artwork Combine tools to get the best results in the shortest time In this final chapter we’ll put together a piece of artwork using all the tools and options that we’ve looked at over the course of this Photoshop Focus Guide interface makes Photoshop as easy to use for home dabblers as it is for the professional artist. Creating illustrations Another use for Photoshop is creating incredible works of art and illustrations. These may be hand-painted, some composite of photographic or 3D images, or some wild combination of other media. In this last chapter we’ll be putting together an illustration combining photos with Photoshop filters, brushes and effects. We’ll need to draw on the skills and techniques learned in the rest of the book in order to create this image, and you’ll
  • 109. see how the tools used are an integral part of the creation process, as well as facilitating the idea itself. As with any other program, you’ll need to be aware of the limitations of Photoshop, or you could end up painting yourself into a corner. Often you will need to think ahead in order to progress smoothly. For instance, it may be necessary, in concept, to remove a foreground element from its background so that it can be used in the artwork seamlessly. However, this can be a very difficult thing to do – arguably the single most difficult task a Photoshop artist can be faced with, especially if the object in question has an ill-defined edge. Wispy hair is a classic case; it can be nearly impossible to extract this from a background using Photoshop alone. Indeed, there are a number of third party plug-ins designed solely to tackle this very problem. Eggs and baskets Do not make the execution of a difficult task pivotal in the creation of an image. It may not work, and if it doesn’t, you’ll be left with nowhere to turn. Photoshop is a rich and varied system; explore it thoroughly and remember any quirks you discover – you never know when you may need to use them. 109ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Artwork project Page 115 Seamlessly blend images over complex backgrounds Page 113 Create duplicate brush strokes by stroking a path Page 119The illustration is completed with Vector Shapes and Type elements Page 110 Selecting and removing a background is tricky,but worth a try Page 111 Paint away holes inside a mask with the Brush tool Page 112 Reconstruct missing parts of an image with the Clone tool
  • 110. Creating a montage Now we can experiment with a montage using all the techniques we’ve learned 110 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 10 Experimentation Because this is a creative exercise,we can risk experimenting with cutting out the background,since there may be a creative solution to any problems we encounter. Background layer When increasing the canvas,the background layer, which cannot have transparent pixels,is filled with the colour in the background colour swatch.Set this before you run the command. Here’s the resulting selection as a mask. Not too great, but not bad either. It’s promising and worth having as a half decent mask, so let’s keep it and refine it further. 4 Let’s begin by attempting to remove the background to see how well we can achieve this.The Magic Wand tool will be first up to bat. Using the default settings of a 32-pixel tolerance, we shift-click to select each sector of the background. 3 We intend to apply as many Photoshop tools as we can, while attempting to produce as artistic an image as we can. Cutting out the background in such an image can be tricky because of the wisps of hair.We need to keep this in mind before we commit to a total removal of the background. 2 Here’s the starting image for our illustration/montage. It’s a straight portrait of a model, with even lighting and good all-round quality. It’s also at a high resolution of about 3,000 pixels. 1
  • 111. 111ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Artwork project Invert a selection We could have avoided this step by inverting the selection before applying it as a layer mask.To invert a selection (as opposed to the pixels within a selection) type [Alt]+[Shift]+[I]. Inverted layer masks If you want to load a selection as an inverted layer mask,you can do so in one action by [Alt]-clicking the Add Layer Mask button in the Layers palette. At this point we need to make the canvas area larger. Using the Image > Canvas Size command we can expand the document horizontally to 4,000 pixels. 8 The layer mask can be smoothed to remove some of the graininess by applying a filter to it. By applying the Gaussian Blur filter to the mask (not the image part of the layer) we can vary the smoothness to get the right effect.This also has the effect of fading the edges of the subject, which looks quite cool. 7 The fixed mask is loaded as a selection and applied as a layer mask to a duplicate of the background layer. Another layer has been added below the new layer and filled with white.The mask needs to be inverted, which you can do by selecting it in the Layers palette and typing [Alt]+[I]. 6 In Channel view we can see the mask and the RGB channels at the same time by clicking the eye icons next to the channels. The mask is displayed as a rubylith overlay, just like in Quick Mask mode.This enables us to paint out the problem areas with careful use of the Brush tool. 5
  • 112. Fix missing parts of the image We can regenerate our subject with the Clone tool and add shading with the Burn tool 112 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 10 Cut and paste Another approach is to use selections to cut and paste sections of the skin from other areas of the image. Safety layer If you are unsure of what you are doing, try cloning onto a new layer rather than the image's own layer. Make sure Use All Layers is checked,though. To add back some shading we begin by adding a bit of highlight to the edge of the arm to match the existing highlight on the shoulder.We’ll use a textured brush for this, and the temptation is to simply paint it on by hand, which is fine, but there is another way. 4 The tones are a bit blotchy but we can even them out using the Blur tool. Remember the tip of reducing the Spacing of the brush to increase the strength of the effect.This won’t fix everything but it’ll help. 3 We use a hard-edged brush for the edge of the arm to get a good line for her arm.The inside parts are filled in using a softer brush.This can be tricky, but don’t worry if it looks flat – we can add back the shading later. 2 Using the Clone tool we can paint back part of the model’s left arm, which had been cropped off in the original image. Sampling from skin tones nearby the cropped part of the image we begin to rebuild the missing portion. 1
  • 113. Using the Pen as a brush We can use the Pen tool to create accurate, repeatable brush strokes 113ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Artwork project Sketchy stroke The technique of using a pen as a stroke can be applied in other ways.You can give vector shapes a more 'hand-drawn' look by stroking them with sketchy brushes. Broken paths Break up a complex path into different sections to add variety and detail to stroked paths. The rest of the arm is touched up to remove any further unevenness in tones on the skin (the eye is very sensitive to this) using the Burn and Clone tools.The result is pretty good, especially if you didn’t know where to look for the fix-up job. 4 By repeating this action with successively smaller radius brushes we can create a nice fake illumination to the edge of the arm. Each stroke passes in exactly the same position because of the path. 3 We select the Dodge tool and set up a large textured brush for it in Midtones mode at 50% strength. By clicking the Stroke Path with Brush button selected in the Paths palette, the Dodge tool will be stroked along the path. 2 In order to have a bit more precision when adding the highlight, we can use the Pen tool.We begin by drawing a path along the length of the arm. 1
  • 114. Using the Pen as a brush continued 114 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 10 Keep it real Overdo a touch-up job and your subject can end up looking like one of those plastic models on the front of countless fashion mags. Remember to keep your effects subtle. Progress report Use the Zoom tool to zoom out of the image to look at the image as a whole. This will give you a good idea of how well the touch-up is coming along. You can be as thorough or as subtle as you like when using the Healing tool. In this example we’ve removed the small wrinkles near the corners of the eye.The right side has been done and the left side has not. 8 Next we can tackle the occasional blemish.The odd spot is removed using the same technique with the Healing Brush tool. Note that even where there are areas of high contrast and detail (such as where the light strikes her face at the edges) the tool will still work well. 7 The most obvious lines to fix are those on the brow. Using a brush that’s about three times the width of the line, we take a sample just above it and paint it out.You must be careful not to overdo it and remove all the lines totally, as it can look too false. 6 The next tool we need to use is the wonderful Healing Brush.We can use this to just subtly remove some wrinkles and blemishes from the model’s face. 5
  • 115. Adding a background We can add a colourful background in order to provide more visual impact 115ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Artwork project Discard or apply? When you discard a mask by dragging it to the trash,you are prompted to discard or apply the mask. Choosing the option to Apply cuts away the masked pixels before the mask is deleted. Trash layers Any layer element can be deleted by dragging it to the trash can icon at the bottom of the palette. Next we load the layer mask as a selection, and then use the Selection > Feather command and a large value (about 60) to smooth the selection.Then we shrink it by 20 pixels using the Selection > Modify > Shrink command. 4 We decide to go with a creative effect to solve this problem – blurring them until they are unnoticeable. Before we do that we remove as much of the white as possible using an eraser.The layer is duplicated and the mask is applied to the layer by dragging it over to the trash beforehand. 3 The render is dragged into the main Photoshop illustration document by dragging its layer from the Layers palette and dropping it over the image. Placed below the masked layer we can see the edges of the original background more clearly. 2 The white background was just a stand-in to enable us to see the effect of the layer mask.We can replace it with a better image, such as this.This is not a photo or a painting, but a 3D render produced using some special focus rendering effect. 1
  • 116. Adding a backgroundcontinued 116 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 10 More layers Always think how something can be accomplished without actually changing any pixels destructively. Rather than adjusting the colours of the girl layer directly we use another layer in Colour blending mode. Overwrite rules You will find that some work you do earlier will be negated by later artistic changes.Don't worry - it's a part of the process that even best laid plans can't avoid. The Opacity is adjusted to get the right blend.Too much and the girl’s colours are washed away; too little and she stands out too much.The greenish/yellow patch of the red layer is removed by cloning over it. 8 To blend the colours of the background and the girl better we can make use of Photoshop’s blending modes.The red background layer is duplicated, blurred and placed above the girl layer. Using Colour mode, the layer’s colours are transferred to the girl layer. 7 We can make use of this same selection again by applying it as a layer mask to the blurred girl layer and inverting it.This fades out the blurred portion, blending it into the background. Levels are used to adjust the degree of blending. 6 The selection is inverted using [Alt]+[Shift]+[I] so that only the outer edges will be affected; the face will stay sharp. Gaussian Blur is used to blur the edges of the girl, producing a forced‘depth of focus’effect and hiding a lot of the white edge. 5
  • 117. 117ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Artwork project Advanced blending Access a layer’s options panel by double-clicking it. Here you can find the advanced blending sliders.In this case,the ‘This Layer’slider is set to Red and the dark slider moved towards the right to fade out those colours only. Split the sliders To‘split’the sliders you [Alt]+drag them.This has the effect of feathering the transparency of the layer to prevent an obvious cut-off point for the blend. A mask is added to remove the sparks that cover the girl’s eyes and face.This is painted on using a large soft brush, varying the opacity as we go, by making use of the numeric key pad. 12 The sharp red layer is once again duplicated and moved to the top.We want some of the sparks to be in front, as well as behind, to give some more depth to the image.The Layer is applied in Screen mode but most of the flat red colour is removed using the sliders in its layer options. 11 In fact, the opposite works well too: applying the duplicated layer in Linear Dodge mode brightens the girl up, but likewise it also intensifies the image – it’s time to make a decision. 10 To intensify the girl layer and add more contrast to it once more, Layer Blending modes come to the rescue. The girl layer is duplicated and applied in Linear Burn mode, with an opacity of 50%. 9
  • 118. Applying artistic detail We can use the Art History Brush here to add some extra background detail 118 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Chapter 10 All about image Because the Art History Brush applies new pixels using original colour,you can make low-res images into high-res ones. Effect limitations Very small images blown up very large will start to show pixels and compression artefacts, so the effect has its limits. A very fine brush is finally applied to pick out the fine edges.You only need to do this where needed, because it can be quite slow.The layer is applied in Hard Light mode and a Gradient Layer Mask fades out the left side.The other elements are repositioned for better composition. 4 Using successively smaller brushes and changing to the Tight Medium Art mode, we can add back some detail.The brushes we used were 200, 100, and then 50 pixels in radius. 3 To get round this we can apply the Art History Brush to‘regenerate’the pixels in the enlarged layer.We mark a previous state as the source for the Art History Brush and begin filling in the canvas with a large brush in Dab mode. 2 A selection is made of the girl’s eyes and copied to a new layer.This layer is enlarged to fill the document. However, when you do this, the image quality will suffer. 1
  • 119. Vector Shape andType layers We can add further creative elements using Vector Shape and Type layers 119ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Artwork project Balancing elements When creating an image such as this,try to balance the foreground and background elements, making sure the background detail does not overpower or clash with the main subject. Big impression Using a Hue/Saturation Adjustment Layer you can change the feel of the entire image just by changing some of the colours. Finally, a layer mask is applied to the Levels Adjustment Layer. Using the Gradient tool set to black and white and Radial mode, a gradient is drawn that protects the girl’s face from the effect of levels. 4 A Levels Adjustment layer is applied to the image and a Vector Shape is used as a mask to create a further layer of detail in the image. A combination of two overlapping Vector Shapes in Exclude mode interacts to create an interesting shape. 3 The Warp Text tool helps to bend the 7 into a more interesting shape, and assists in integrating it into the image depth- wise. A layer mask aids this further making it appear to wrap around the girl. Applied in Screen mode, an Outer Glow Layer Style makes for a subtle effect. 2 A Type layer is added by clicking on the image with the Type tool. Appropriately, the number 7 will be used as a graphic element for the image, since 7 is the current version of Photoshop. 1
  • 120. Onyour CD-ROM/DVD To access the programs and files on this disc, including the photo collection from Image Source, first insert the disc into your drive. Whether you’re using a PC or an Apple Mac, the disc will work equally well. If it doesn’t run automatically, look at the opposite page to find out how to start your installation manually. Before you go on The first item that should appear on your screen is the disclaimer window; here you’ll need to click Featured software… Video tutorials to take you through the tools Every Photoshop hotkey for PC and Mac on ‘I Accept’. Please remember that this disc has been thoroughly scanned and tested at all stages of production, but – as with all new software – we still recommend that you run a virus checker before use. We also recommend that you have an up-to-date backup of your hard disk before using this disc. Future Publishing does not accept responsibility for any disruption, damage and/or loss to your data or computer system that may occur while using this disc, or the data and programs on it. Please consult your Here’s how to get the most from the disc that accompanies your Focus Guide As well as the printed tutorials in this issue, George Cairns has supplied a range of video tutorials covering a wide variety of the tools available to Photoshop users. George will take you through the basics of each tool, what they are called, what they do, where they can be found as well as a brief description of how to use them. Watch and learn about the following essential tools:Blur tool,Brush tool,Crop tool,Dodge and Burn tool,Erase tool,Eye Dropper tool, Gradient tool,Hand tool,Healing tool,History Brush tool,Lassoo tool,MagicWand tool,Move tool,Note tool and Slice tool. VIDEO TUTORIALS The toolbar explained by Photoshop expert George Cairns Photoshop expert George Cairns takes you through the tools of the trade in our superb video tutorials
  • 121. network administrator before attempting to install any software on a networked PC. Installation Once inside you’ll find yourself on our introduction screen, with a number of options in the menu bar along the top. Click on the relevant link in the menu bar to access the file or program that you require. If you have a query about your disc’s interface or content, email our support team ([email protected]) for help. If you want to talk to a member of the team, call 01225 822743. Please note that we can only provide basic advice on using the interface and installing the software. We cannot give in-depth help on specific applications, or on your computer’s particular hardware or operating system. 121ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE On your CD-ROM/DVD Finding your files Click on the Focus Guide link at the top of the disc interface screen to access all the files that accompany this book. The PDF documents on your disc, provided by GFX^TM, contain every Photoshop 7.0 hotkey for both PC and Mac. A hotkey is simply a keyboard shortcut that saves you having to click through on-screen menus with your mouse. While you may know that pressing [Ctrl]+[C] on your keyboard is how you would copy a selection, for example, you may not know that 'Fill from History and Preserve Transparency' can be accessed by [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Shift]+ [Backspace].These indispensable documents catalogue over 250 keyboard shortcuts and are a useful resource for Photoshop beginners and experienced users alike. PHOTOSHOP HOTKEYS Over 250 keyboard shortcuts for just about any Photoshop task There’sawealthofPhotoshoptraining materialandexperienceontheGFX^TM website:www.user.fundy.net/morris http://user.fundy.net/morris
  • 122. Index A Add Anchor Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Adjustment (Levels, Curves and Hue/Saturation). 69, 71, 77 Adjustment layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 77 Adobe Illustrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 91 Alpha channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Annotation, Notes and Measure tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-107 Anti-aliasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Art History Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 118 Auto measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 B Backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66-67, 115-117 Bevelled and Embossed type . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Bézier handles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 92, 94 Blending mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Brush dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Brush hardness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Brush shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Brush tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Brushes and Pencil tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-45 Brushes – customisable, preset. . . . . . . . . . . 35 Brushes palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-39 Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-76, 78,79,112 C Changing Marquees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 65 Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Circular Marquee tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Circular gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 49, 50, 112 Cloning and Healing tools . . . . . . . . . . . 46-53 Cloning skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 CMYK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 104 Color palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Colour Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Colour Sampler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 106 Colour Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Contiguous option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 67 Convert Anchor Point tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Corel Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Corel Painter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Count Jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Creating a montage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-111 Creating Top Quality Artwork . . . . . . 108-119 Custom Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 D Darken mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Delete Anchor Point tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Destination mode in Healing . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Direct and Path Selection tools . . . . . . . 30-31 Dither . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Dodge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-76, 78, 79,113 Dual Brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 E Effects tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-79 Elliptical Marquee tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 20 Exposure tools (Dodge, Burn and Sponge) . . . . 68-69, 75-79 Extrude and Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Eye Dropper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104-105 F Fade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Feathering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Fill tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-58 Finger Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Flow setting for Brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Focus tools (Blur, Sharpen and Smudge)70-74 Focus and Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Foreground to Background, Transparent and Custom gradients . . . . . . 60 Freehand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 91 G Gaussian Blur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 111 Gradient, Fill and Eraser tools . . . . . . . . . 54-67 Gradient Masks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Gradient Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Gradients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-65 Graphics tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 H Healing Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51-53 Healing Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 114 Healing Patch tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52-53 Highlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 79 History Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42-44 Horizontal and Vertical Type . . . . . . . . . 83, 87 I Intersect mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 K Kerning, Leading and Scale . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 85 L Lasso tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15 Index Turn straight to the information you need with the help of our comprehensive index 124 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES
  • 123. 125ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES – FOCUS GUIDE Index Polygonal Lasso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Q Quick Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19 Quick Mask mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 79 R Rasterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 83, 88 Rectangular Marquee tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Rubber Stamp (Clone) tool . . . . . . . . . . . 48-50 Rulers, Guides and Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 107 S Sample mode in Cloning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Sample mode in Healing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Saturate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Scattering in Brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Scratch disk space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Selecting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Selection tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21, 23 Selections for web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Shadows mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 79 Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 37 Single Column/Row Marquee tool . . . . . . 12 Slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Strength slider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 73, 74 Styled Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Subtract mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 T Textures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Tolerance setting for Eraser tools . . . . . 66-67 Tolerance setting for Magic Wand . . . . . . . 16 Tolerance setting for Paint Bucket . . . . 56-57 Transparency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Layer Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 64, 117 Layer Folders (Layer Sets). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Layer Styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Levels Adjustment layer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Lightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Linear Dodge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Linear gradient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Luminosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 M Magic and Background Erasers . . . . . . . 66-67 Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17, 56, 110 Magnetic Lasso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Marching ants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20, 64-65, 98 Measure tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 107 Midtones mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-76, 78, 113 Modifying selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Move tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 28-29 Move, Align and Distribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N Navigating and Editing Images . . . . . . . 22-31 Navigator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 72 O Opacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 P Paint Bucket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56-57 Panning and Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Paths,Vectors and Masks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-99 Pattern mode in Healing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Pen tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-93, 113-114 Type and text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Type layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-88, 119 Type masks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Type options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Type Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-89 U Undo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Use All Layers in selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Using the Brushes and Pencil tools . . . 32-45 Using the Cloning and Healing tools . 46-53 V Vector Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 95-97, 119 Vector text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 View Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 W Wacom Intuos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Warp Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 119
  • 124. Glossary 126 FOCUS GUIDE – ADOBE PHOTOSHOP TOOL TECHNIQUES Glossary Finding the lingo a puzzle?Here’s your handy guide to essential terms found in this Focus Guide Alpha channel Alpha channels are stored alongside colour channels within Photoshop files but do not affect the final image printout. Instead, they store information that is helpful to you, such as saved Masks. Anti-aliasing Moving pixels around can cause undesirable jagged edges to appear, where edited pixels have not blended smoothly together. Anti- aliasing refers to the process of smoothing out these jagged edges for a more natural look. Brush Brushes enable you to paint on Photoshop images with colour, other bits of images and pre- defined patterns. They mimic real brushes in that you can alter the size, hardness and texture in order to achieve the effects you want. Colour channel There are three colour channels in all colour images: red, green and blue. Each one contains information specific to that colour. Photoshop enables you to alter each channel independently, making it possible to reduce grainy blue skies without affecting the rest of an image, for example. Feathering Softening the edges of pixels in a selection, so that they will blend smoothly when moved elsewhere. Photoshop does this by only partially selecting some of the pixels around the edge of the selection. Filter One of Photoshop’s preset tools that applies an effect to an image (or a selection within the image). Examples include sharpening, blurring, creative and artistic filters. You’ll find a complete list by clicking in the Filter menu at the top of the Photoshop window. Font A commonly used term used to describe the typeface you are using. For instance, Times New Roman is a font where all the letters look fairly formal. In Arial, however, all the letters are far simpler looking. GIF (or .gif) A type of image file format best suited for producing simple images for the web. Examples include logos, banners, buttons and anything made up of only a few flat colours. Greyscale An image is greyscale if it contains no colour information. Almost all digital camera files, for instance, will be in colour. But you can turn them into black and white with many fine gradations of grey, from within Photoshop by turning them in to greyscale images. Image size This refers to the physical size of an image. For instance, a photograph you are working on may be 20x15cm. This matters most when you come to printing out the image. JPG (or .jpeg) A type of image file format that gives a desirable combination of small file sizes and good quality photo reproduction. It is commonly used in digital cameras to store the images that you take. The small files sizes also make it ideal for the web. Layer Layers containing effects or bits of images can be stacked on top of the original image layer (the background) in order to change the appearance of the image. Layers do not directly affect the layers beneath them, in the same way as a blurry piece of glass placed over a photograph does not actually affect the photograph – in both cases, it is the appearance that is changed, leaving the original untouched. Marquee The flashing dotted outline that surrounds a selection.You’ll also see it referred to in some places as ‘marching ants’. Navigator In Photoshop’s default screen layout, the Navigator is positioned in the top-right corner and gives you access to the whole image, even if you are currently zoomed in to a specific part. The red box within the Navigator image denotes the area that is currently on screen; you can move around your image by clicking and dragging the red box around the Navigator image. Resolution A measure of how many pixels make up an image. A resolution of 300dpi (dots per inch) is recognised as the minimum if you’re intending to print your images. Selection Any part of an image which you select with Photoshop’s tools, shown by a marquee around it. You can then work on certain parts of an image, or remove then without affecting the rest. Slices These are special kinds of selections for web page design.An image can be split into segments or slices, and Photoshop creates an HTML file, plus separate image files, for each slice.The web browser then reassembles the slices in their original position to give the appearance of a single image. Thumbnail A small, ‘thumbnail-sized’ version of an image. You’ll find them in folders of images and in Photoshop’s File Browser – Because they’re smaller than a full size image you can browse through them more quickly, which makes finding the file you’re after far easier. Pixel An abbreviation for ‘picture element’, it is essentially a tiny dot of colour on screen. Most images are made of up millions of pixels, which combine to make an image look seamless. Zoom in very close on an image, however, and you can clearly see these individual pixels. PSD Photoshop’s own file format, which preserves things such as layers and channels. If you’re editing an image file, it’s sensible to save it as a PSD, in order for the changes you have made to remain editable when you next open it. Tool Options bar When a tool is selected, the corresponding Tool Options bar automatically appears at the top of the Photoshop window, giving you access to various options, including such things as Brush Sizes and Feathering.
  • 125. Notes
  • 126. Notes
  • 127. Notes
  • 128. Notes
  • 130. Ten chapters of expert tips and advice All book related CD content can be found on the magazine cover disc Master every tool in the Photoshop toolbar Navigate and manipulate images with ease Use the Cloning and Healing tools to retouch your photos Make pixel-perfect selections every time Harness the power of the stunning Effects tools Tailor-made video tutorials Every keyboard shortcut for PC and Mac FocusGuideFrom the makers of Computer Arts Adobe Photoshop Printed in the UK. © Future Publishing 2004 Free with issue 19 of